Chevrolet 2011 HHR Owner Manual

Add to my manuals
444 Pages

advertisement

Chevrolet 2011 HHR Owner Manual | Manualzz

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual

M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Object Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

2011 Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual

M

Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101

Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model names, and vehicle body designs appearing in this manual including, but not limited to, GM, the GM logo,

CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and HHR are trademarks and/or service marks of General Motors

LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “ General Motors of Canada

Limited ” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Canadian Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:

Helm, Incorporated

P.O. Box 07130

Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123

Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française www.helminc.com

Index

To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 20840901 B Second Printing © 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

iii

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

Safety Warnings and Symbols

Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death.

{

WARNING:

These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.

Notice: This means there is something that could result in property or vehicle damage. This would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means “ Do

Not, ” “ Do not do this, ” or

“ Do not let this happen.

Vehicle Symbols

The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information.

*

: This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information.

iv

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more information on the symbol, refer to the Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

#

: Air Conditioning

!

: Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar ®

$

: Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O

: Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

.

: Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3

: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

:

: Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

>

: Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M

: Windshield Washer Fluid v

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

2

NOTES

Black plate (6,1) vi

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Section 1 In Brief

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Portable Audio Devices (Auxiliary Input or

USB Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Bluetooth

®

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

OnStar

®

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

1-1

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Instrument Panel

Black plate (2,1)

1-2

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

A.

Outlet Adjustment on page 4 ‑ 21 .

B.

Cruise Control on page 4 ‑ 8

(If Equipped).

C.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4 ‑ 4 .

D.

Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4 ‑ 24 .

E.

Windshield Wipers on page 4 ‑ 5 .

Windshield Washer on page 4 ‑ 6

.

F.

Instrument Panel Storage on page 3 ‑ 46 .

G.

Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5 ‑ 8

(If Equipped).

Electronic Stability Control (ESC). See

Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) on page 5 ‑ 6 .

H.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 ‑ 27 .

I. Rear Side Cargo Door Buttons (If Equipped). See

Rear Side Cargo Door on page 3 ‑ 12 .

J.

Hood Release on page 6 ‑ 12 .

K. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See

Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4 ‑ 38 .

L. Data Link Connector (DLC). See

Malfunction

Indicator Lamp on page 4 ‑ 34 .

M.

Horn on page 4 ‑ 3

.

N.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4 ‑ 81

(If Equipped).

O.

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 ‑ 14 .

P.

Audio System(s) on page 4 ‑ 52

.

Q.

Climate Control System on page 4 ‑ 18 .

R.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 4 ‑ 7

.

S. Shift Lever (Manual Shown). See

Manual

Transmission Operation on page 3 ‑ 31

and

Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3 ‑ 28

.

T.

Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4 ‑ 16

(If Equipped).

Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See

Ashtray(s) and

Cigarette Lighter on page 4 ‑ 18 .

U.

Fog Lamps on page 4 ‑ 13

(If Equipped).

V.

Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 .

W.

Glove Box on page 3 ‑ 46

.

Initial Drive Information

This section provides a brief overview about some of the important features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, refer to each of the features which can be found later in this owner manual.

1-3

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and unlock the doors from up to 18 m (60 feet) away from the vehicle.

Press

K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within five seconds to unlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.

Press and hold * or + for approximately one second to open the rear driver or passenger side door.

Press L and release to locate the vehicle.

Press alarm.

L and hold for three seconds to sound the panic

Press

L again to cancel the panic alarm.

See

Keys on page 3 ‑ 3

and

Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 5 .

Remote Vehicle Start

With this feature the engine can be started from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press

Q

.

3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and hold

/ until the turn signal lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running. The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start can be extended only once.

1-4

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:

.

Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press and hold / until the parking lamps turn off.

.

.

Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

Turn the ignition on and then back off.

See

Remote Vehicle Start on page 3 ‑ 7 .

Door Locks

From outside the vehicle, unlock the door using either the key or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

From inside, use the manual lock knobs located at the top of the door panel near the window.

See

Door Locks on page 3 ‑ 9 .

The power door lock switches are on the front doors.

Power Door Locks

Press the top or bottom of the switch to unlock or lock the doors.

For more information see

Power Door Locks on page 3 ‑ 10

.

Liftgate

Open the liftgate by pressing the touchpad located in the handle above the license plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise by itself.

See

Liftgate on page 3 ‑ 12

for more information.

1-5

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Windows

Black plate (6,1)

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the seat to unlock it.

On vehicles with power windows, the switches are on each of the side doors. The driver door also has switches that control the passenger and rear windows.

Press the front of the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up to raise it.

For more information, see

Power Windows on page 3 ‑ 17

.

2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure it is locked in place.

See

Manual Seats on page 2 ‑ 4

for more information.

1-6

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Power Seats Power Lumbar

Black plate (7,1)

To adjust a power seat, if available:

.

.

Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.

Raise or lower the front of the seat by moving the front of the control up or down.

.

Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.

See

Power Seat on page 2 ‑ 5

for more information.

If available, press and hold the front or rear of the control to increase or decrease lumbar support.

Release the control when the seatback reaches the desired level of support.

See

Power Lumbar on page 2 ‑ 6

for more information.

1-7

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Reclining Seatbacks

Black plate (8,1)

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

See

Reclining Seatbacks on page 2 ‑ 8

for more information.

Second Row Seats

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position, and then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the upright position:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position.

1-8

The seatbacks can be folded flat.

For detailed instructions for lowering the seatback(s), see

Split Folding Rear Seat on page 2 ‑ 12

.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Heated Seats

Black plate (9,1)

If available, the buttons are on the climate control panel.

Head Restraint Adjustment

Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seating position, change the seatback recline angle as little as necessary while keeping the seat and the head restraint height in the proper position.

For more information see

Head Restraints on page 2 ‑ 2

and

Manual Seats on page 2 ‑ 4

.

Press the button once to turn on the heated seat at the high setting. Both lights below the heated seat symbol turn on. Press the button a second time to change to the low setting. Only the bottom light is on when the low setting is selected. Press the button a third time to turn the heated seat off.

See

Heated Seats on page 2 ‑ 6

for more information.

1-9

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Safety Belts

Black plate (10,1)

Sensing System for Passenger

Airbag

The passenger sensing system, if equipped, will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbags and roof ‐ rail airbags are not affected by this.

If the vehicle has a passenger sensing system, the passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.

Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use safety belts properly.

.

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2 ‑ 15

.

.

.

.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2 ‑ 19

.

Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2 ‑ 28 .

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2 ‑ 45

.

United States Canada

See

Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 68

for important information.

1-10

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on the driver door armrest.

Interior Mirror

Vehicles with a manual rearview mirror can be adjusted by holding the mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind the vehicle. To avoid glare from the headlamps behind you, push the tab, located at the base of the mirror, toward you for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.

Vehicles with an automatic dimming rearview mirror will automatically reduce the glare from the headlamps of the vehicle behind. The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the ignition is turned to start.

See

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3 ‑ 39 .

1. Press the left or right side of the selector, located beneath the control pad, to adjust the driver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the control pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.

Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return to its original position.

1-11

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

Steering Wheel Adjustment

The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down.

3. Pull the lever up to lock in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Interior Lighting

Dome Lamps

The front and rear dome lamps turn on when any door is opened. To turn on all dome lamps with the doors closed, turn the instrument panel brightness thumbwheel located to the right of the steering wheel and above the radio, completely to the right.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps located on the front and rear dome lamps.

To turn the front reading lamps on or off, press the lamp lens. To turn the rear reading lamps on or off, press the button next to the lamp.

For more information, see:

.

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 ‑ 14 .

.

Entry/Exit Lighting on page 4 ‑ 14 .

1-12

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Exterior Lighting

The lever is on the left side of the steering column.

5 : Turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.

;

: Turns on the parking lamps and taillamps only.

AUTO: Automatically turns on the Daytime Running

Lamps during daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at night.

O : This position is the momentary Off/On switch for the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this only works when the vehicles with an automatic transmission are in P (Park) and vehicles with a manual transmission have the parking brake set and the vehicle is not moving.

For more information, see:

.

Headlamps on page 4 ‑ 11 .

.

.

Fog Lamps on page 4 ‑ 13

.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4 ‑ 12 .

.

Automatic Headlamp System on page 4 ‑ 12 .

1-13

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Black plate (14,1)

8 : Single wipe, move the lever to z and then release it. Several wipes, hold lever on z longer.

Windshield Washer: Press the button at the end of the lever until the washers begin.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on the right side of the steering wheel.

1 : Fast wipes.

6 : Slow wipes.

& : Sets a delay between wipes.

6 : When the lever is in the delay position, turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes.

During intermittent wiping mode, the delay cycle time is sensitive to vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed increases the delay cycle time decreases and wiper movement occurs more frequently.

9 : Turns the windshield wipers off.

1-14

The rear window wiper/washer button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls.

5 : Press to turn on the intermittent wiping setting that has a longer delay.

Y : Press to wash and wipe the window.

Z : Press to turn on an intermittent setting that has a shorter delay.

See

Windshield Wipers on page 4 ‑ 5

,

Windshield

Washer on page 4 ‑ 6 , and

Rear Window Wiper/

Washer on page 4 ‑ 7 .

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Climate Controls

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with this system.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

A. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

C. Air Delivery Mode

Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Outside Air

F. Air Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger

See

Climate Control System on page 4 ‑ 18

.

Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown

O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM ™ , if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.

© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

1-15

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

4 : For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features, press to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA song. Song title information will be displayed on the top line of the display while the artist information will be displayed on the bottom line, if the information is available during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.

When information is not available, "No Info" displays.

For more information about these and other radio features, see

Audio System(s) on page 4 ‑ 52

and

Radio(s) on page 4 ‑ 54

.

Storing a Favorite Station

Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio stations are stored as either favorites or presets.

For radios with a FAV button, a maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM ™ stations.

For radios without a FAV button, up to 18 stations

(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on the six numbered buttons.

See

Radio(s) on page 4 ‑ 54 .

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for the Radio with CD (MP3) and USB port or Radio with a Single CD (MP3) player:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or

ON/RUN.

2. Press

O to turn the radio on.

3. Press

H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.

4. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs that you want to change.

5. Increase or decrease the time or date by turning f clockwise or counterclockwise.

For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your specific audio system, see

Setting the Clock on page 4 ‑ 53 .

Satellite Radio

XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the

48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast to coast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive the XM service.

1-16

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

For more information, refer to:

.

www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)

.

www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See “ XM Satellite Radio Service ” under

Radio(s) on page 4 ‑ 54 .

Portable Audio Devices (Auxiliary

Input or USB Port)

This vehicle may have an auxiliary input jack and a USB port, located on the audio faceplate.

External devices such as iPods ® , laptop computers,

MP3 players, CD changers, USB storage devices, etc.

can be connected to the auxiliary input jack using a

3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or the USB port depending on the audio system.

Press the CD/AUX button to play audio from the portable player.

See “ Using the Auxiliary Input Jack ” and “ Using the

USB Port ” under

Radio(s) on page 4 ‑ 54

.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controls can be adjusted using the controls on the right side of the steering wheel.

e + / e − : Increases or decreases volume.

w

/ x

: Press to change radio stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and navigate folders on an iPod

® or USB device.

b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer than two seconds to interact with the OnStar

® or Bluetooth systems.

c : Press to reject an incoming call, or to end a call.

For more information, see

Audio Steering Wheel

Controls on page 4 ‑ 81

.

1-17

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

Bluetooth

®

For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle ’ s audio system and controls.

The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used in the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions. For more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.

For more information, see

Bluetooth ® on page 4 ‑ 73

.

Driver Information Center (DIC)

The DIC display is located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster. It shows the status of many vehicle systems and enables access to the personalization menu.

The DIC buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel.

INFO: Press to scroll through the vehicle information displays.

r : Press to reset some vehicle information displays, select a personalization setting, or acknowledge a warning message.

For more information, see

Driver Information Center

(DIC) on page 4 ‑ 38 .

1-18

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Vehicle Personalization

Some vehicle features can be programmed by using the DIC buttons on the left side of the steering wheel.

These features include:

.

.

Oil Life Reset

Units

.

.

RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback

Door Lock and Unlock Settings

.

Language

See

DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 ‑ 46 .

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel.

J : Press to turn the cruise control system on and off.

The indicator light on the button comes on when the cruise control is on and goes off when the cruise control is turned off.

RES+: Press briefly to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed, or press and hold to accelerate.

SET − : Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or make the vehicle decelerate.

For more information, see

Cruise Control on page 4 ‑ 8

.

1-19

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Storage Compartments

Vehicles with a panel/cargo cover feature can be adjusted into four positions.

Black plate (20,1)

Place the panel lower position for additional cargo space above it.

Place the panel in the upper position to conceal the cargo area.

There is also a center position and a sideways position that allows access to the rear cargo area.

For more information, see

Rear Compartment Storage

Panel/Cover on page 3 ‑ 48 .

1-20

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

Power Outlets

Accessory power outlets can be used to connect electrical equipment, such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two accessory power outlets located on the instrument panel below the climate controls and at the rear of the center console. There may be another outlet in the rear cargo area on the passenger side.

Remove the cover to access and replace when not in use.

See

Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4 ‑ 16

and

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on page 4 ‑ 18

.

Performance and Maintenance

Traction Control System (TCS)

The traction control system limits wheel spin. The system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is started.

.

To turn off traction control, press and release the instrument panel.

F illuminates and the appropriate DIC message displays. See

DIC

Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

.

d on

.

Press and release the button again to turn on traction control.

For more information, see

Traction Control System

(TCS) on page 5 ‑ 8 .

1-21

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control system assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. The system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is started.

.

To turn off both traction control and

Electronic Stability Control, press and hold d until

F illuminates and the appropriate

DIC message displays. See

DIC Warnings and

Messages on page 4 ‑ 41 .

.

Press and release the button again to turn on both systems.

For more information, see

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) on page 5 ‑ 6

.

Tire Pressure Monitor

This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor

System (TPMS).

The TPMS warming light alerts you to a significant loss in pressure of one of the vehicles tires.

If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the tire loading information label. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23

. The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tire pressure warning light may appear when the vehicle is first started and then turn off. This may be an early indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normal monthly tire maintenance. It is the driver ’ s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressures.

See

Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 ‑ 58

and

Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 ‑ 59

.

1-22

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit

This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit. The kit can be used to seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.

See

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6 ‑ 73

for complete operating information.

If the vehicle came with a jack and spare tire, see

Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 ‑ 80 .

Engine Oil Life System

The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter.

The oil life system should be reset to 100% only following an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.

2. Press the information and reset buttons on the

Driver Information Center (DIC) at the same time to enter the personalization menu.

3. Press the information button to scroll through the available personalization menu modes until the

DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.

4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell you the system has been reset.

5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

For vehicles with the 2.2L (VIN Code V) or

2.4L (VIN Code B) engines, you can also reset the system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, then start the engine.

See

Engine Oil Life System on page 6 ‑ 20 .

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See

Fuel E85

(85% Ethanol) on page 6 ‑ 7

. For all other vehicles, use only the unleaded gasoline described under

Gasoline Octane on page 6 ‑ 6 .

1-23

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (24,1)

Driving for Better Fuel Economy

Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.

.

Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.

.

.

Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.

Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.

.

.

.

.

When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.

Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require.

Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.

Combine several trips into a single trip.

.

.

Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC

Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near the size.

Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

Battery

This vehicle has a maintenance free battery located in the cargo area. Access to the battery is not necessary to jump start the vehicle. There are positive (+) and negative ( − ) terminals in the engine compartment.

See

Battery on page 6 ‑ 35

and

Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 36

.

1-24

Roadside Assistance Program

U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This program provides technically trained advisors who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor repair information or towing arrangements.

See

Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7

for more information.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have an active OnStar subscription, press the Q button and the current GPS location will be sent to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem, contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location to get you the help you need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service that includes online service reminders, vehicle maintenance tips, online owner manual, special privileges and more.

Sign up today at: www.chevyownercenter.com

(U.S.) or www.gm.ca

(Canada).

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (25,1)

OnStar

®

For vehicles with an active OnStar subscription, OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live Advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security, navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built ‐ in sensors can automatically alert an

OnStar Advisor who is immediately connected to the vehicle to see if you need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q

: Push this blue button to connect to a specially trained OnStar Advisor to verify your account information and to answer questions.

]

: Push this red emergency button to get priority help from specially trained OnStar Emergency Advisors.

X : Push this button for hands ‐ free, voice ‐ activated calling and to give voice commands for Hands ‐ Free

Calling and Turn ‐ by ‐ Turn Navigation.

Automatic Crash Response, Emergency Services,

Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle

Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside

Assistance, Turn ‐ by ‐ Turn Navigation, and Hands ‐ Free

Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles. For more information, see the OnStar Owner's Guide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1 ‐ 888 ‐ 466 ‐ 7827) or TTY 1 ‐ 877 ‐ 248 ‐ 2080; or push Q to speak with an

OnStar Advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

1-25

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (26,1)

For a full description of OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the glove box.

OnStar service is subject to the OnStar Terms and

Conditions included in the OnStar Glove Box Kit.

OnStar service requires wireless communication networks and the Global Positioning System (GPS) satellite network. Not all OnStar services are available everywhere or on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service can ’ t work unless your vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area, and the wireless service provider has coverage, network capacity, reception, and technology compatible with

OnStar's service. Service involving location information about your vehicle can ’ t work unless GPS signals are available, unobstructed, and compatible with the OnStar hardware. The vehicle has to have a working electrical system and adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate. OnStar service may not work if the OnStar equipment isn ’ t properly installed or you haven ’ t maintained it and your vehicle is in good working order and in compliance with all government regulations. If you try to add, connect, or modify any equipment or software in your vehicle, OnStar service may not work. Other problems OnStar can ’ t control may prevent service to you, such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather, electrical system design and architecture of your vehicle, damage to important parts of your vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone network congestion or jamming.

See

Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 18

for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) rules and

Industry Canada Standards RSS-210/220/310.

OnStar Steering Wheel Controls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free calling. See

Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4 ‑ 81

for more information.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more information.

1-26

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (27,1)

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar Advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system may not be functioning properly. Push the Q button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light appears), your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated. Push the Q button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.

OnStar

®

If the vehicle is equipped with an active OnStar system, that system may also record data in crash or near crash-like situations. The OnStar Terms and

Conditions provides information on data collection and use and is available in the OnStar Glove Box Kit, at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by pushing

Q and speaking to an Advisor.

1-27

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

2

NOTES

Black plate (28,1)

1-28

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Section 2 Seats and Restraint System

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Passenger Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . 2-66

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . 2-74

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a

Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77

2-1

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Head Restraints

The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING:

With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.

Black plate (2,1)

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head.

This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

2-2

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head restraint, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the restraint down.

Black plate (3,1)

Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place.

The head restraints are not designed to be removed.

The rear seat has headrests that can be adjusted up and down.

2-3

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{ WARNING:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the seat to unlock it.

2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure it is locked in place.

2-4

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Seat Height Adjuster Power Seat

Black plate (5,1)

If available, move the lever up or down to raise or lower the driver seat.

To adjust a power seat, if available:

.

Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.

.

.

Raise or lower the front of the seat by moving the front of the control up or down.

Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.

To adjust the seatback, see

Reclining Seatbacks on page 2 ‑ 8 .

2-5

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Power Lumbar

If available, press and hold the front or rear of the control to increase or decrease lumbar support.

Release the control when the seatback reaches the desired level of support.

Black plate (6,1)

Heated Seats

{ WARNING:

If you cannot feel temperature change or pain to the skin, the seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns, people with such a condition should use care when using the seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover, or similar item. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat.

2-6

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

If available, the buttons are on the climate control panel.

Press the button once to turn on the heated seat at the high setting. Both lights below the heated seat symbol turn on. Press the button a second time to change to the low setting. Only the bottom light is on when the low setting is selected. Press the button a third time to turn the heated seat off.

The heated seats are canceled when the ignition is turned off. Press the button to use the heated seats after the vehicle is re ‐ started.

2-7

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

Black plate (8,1)

Passenger Recliner Lever Shown, Driver Similar

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position, and then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

2-8

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

{ WARNING:

If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.

Black plate (9,1)

To return the seatback to the upright position:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

2-9

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

{ WARNING:

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash, the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.

This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.

2-10

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Passenger Folding Seatback

{ WARNING:

If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating airbag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects away from the area in which an airbag would inflate. For more information, see

Where

Are the Airbags? on page 2 ‑ 63

and

Loading the

Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23 .

{ WARNING:

Things you put on this seatback can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Remove or secure all items before driving.

To fold the seatback:

1. Move the front passenger seat rearward to allow room to fold the seatback forward. See

Manual

Seats on page 2 ‑ 4

for more information. The

Black plate (11,1) head restraint may need to be removed if the seat cannot be moved fully rearward. If removing the head restraint, store it so that it will not move while the vehicle is in motion.

2. Place the seatback in the upright position. See

Reclining Seatbacks on page 2 ‑ 8

for more information.

3. Pull up on either lever on the rear of the seatback.

Fold the seatback forward until it disengages.

4. Continue folding the seatback forward until it is completely folded. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

2-11

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

To raise the seatback to the upright position:

1. Pull up on either lever.

2. Push the seatback up and to the rear until it locks in place.

{ WARNING:

If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear Seat

On vehicles with a rear seat, the seatbacks can be folded flat.

To lower the rear seatback(s):

1. Move the front seat forward and/or put the front seatback in an upright position so it does not interfere with folding the rear seatback forward.

2. Open the rear door while the vehicle is parked.

3. The rear head restraint may need to be removed if it interferes with the front seat when the front seat is moved back in place. If removed, store the head restraint where it cannot move while the vehicle is in motion.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.

2-12

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

4. Move the safety belt out of the way before lowering the seatback. Do not let the safety belt get caught between the seatback and seat cushion as the seatback is folded.

Black plate (13,1)

5. Pull up on the knob located on the top of the seatback on the outboard side to release the seatback.

2-13

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

To raise the rear seatback(s):

{ WARNING:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.

2-14

Black plate (14,1)

1. Lift the seatback up and push rearward until you hear a click. Keep the safety belt clear of the seat and not twisted.

The release knob on the top of the seatback has a red ring. If the seatback is not fully latched this ring will be visible. Push on the seatback until the ring is not visible.

{ WARNING:

If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always pull forward on the top of the seatback at the area of the latch to be sure it is locked.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone

This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly. It also describes some things not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING:

Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too.

{ WARNING:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in the vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts. See

Safety Belt Reminders on page 4 ‑ 25

for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly hurt or killed.

2-15

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter

... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels.

2-16

Put someone on it.

Black plate (16,1)

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

2-17

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1) or the instrument panel...

2-18 or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.

You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Questions and Answers About Safety

Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of them.

Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection.

That is true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a crash — even one that is not your fault — you and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph

(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

This section is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see

Older Children on page 2 ‑ 34

or

Infants and Young Children on page 2 ‑ 38 . Follow those rules

for everyone's protection.

It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.

Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

2-19

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety belt, there is important information you should know.

In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.

If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

2-20

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Q: What is wrong with this?

Black plate (21,1)

{ WARNING:

You can be seriously hurt if the shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way.

2-21

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Q: What is wrong with this?

Black plate (22,1)

{ WARNING:

You can be seriously hurt if the lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way.

2-22

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Q: What is wrong with this?

Black plate (23,1)

{ WARNING:

You can be seriously injured if the belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle the belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

2-23

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Q: What is wrong with this?

Black plate (24,1)

{ WARNING:

You can be seriously injured if the belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

2-24

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

Black plate (25,1)

{ WARNING:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury.

Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.

You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

2-25

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Q: What is wrong with this?

Black plate (26,1)

{ WARNING:

You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The belt is behind the body.

2-26

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Q: What is wrong with this?

Black plate (27,1)

{ WARNING:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

2-27

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (28,1)

Lap-Shoulder Belt

All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “ Seats ” in the

Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

If the belt is not long enough, see

Safety Belt

Extender on page 2 ‑ 34 .

Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See

“ Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ” later in this section for use and important safety information.

2-28

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (29,1)

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.

2-29

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (30,1)

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger seating positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See

How to

Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2 ‑ 19 .

Push down on the release button (A) and move the height adjuster to the desired position. The adjuster can be moved up by pushing the release button up on the shoulder belt guide.

After the height adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it down without pressing the release button to make sure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash and rear events.

Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, They will need to be replaced, and probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt system. See

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a

Crash on page 2 ‑ 77 .

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides

This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides for each outboard passenger position in the rear seat.

If not, they are available through your dealer. The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head.

2-30

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:

Black plate (31,1)

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip.

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

2-31

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.

The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top.

Black plate (32,1)

{ WARNING:

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

2-32

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (33,1)

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of the elastic cord exposed.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

2-33

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Black plate (34,1)

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test:

.

Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.

2-34

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (35,1)

.

.

.

.

Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “ Rear

Safety Belt Comfort Guides ” under

Lap-Shoulder

Belt on page 2 ‑ 28

for more information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.

Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.

Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.

If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.

It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

Also see “ Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ” under

Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2 ‑ 28 .

According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position.

2-35

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly.

{ WARNING:

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Black plate (36,1)

2-36

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

{ WARNING:

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

Black plate (37,1)

2-37

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (38,1)

Infants and Young Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every

Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap ‐ shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.

Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING:

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only

40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's arms. An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint.

2-38

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

{ WARNING:

Never do this.

Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.

(Continued)

Black plate (39,1)

WARNING: (Continued)

It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.

2-39

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (40,1)

Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.

Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child's weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs.

{ WARNING:

To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash, infants need complete support. This is because an infant's neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant's body, the back and shoulders. Infants should always be secured in rear-facing child restraints.

2-40

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (41,1)

{ WARNING:

A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (B) provides restraint for the child's body with the harness.

2-41

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.

A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

Black plate (42,1)

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle safety belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

(LATCH) on page 2 ‑ 45

for more information. A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

2-42

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (43,1)

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is in it.

In some areas, Certified Child Passenger Safety

Technicians (CPSTs) are available to inspect and demonstrate how to correctly use and install child restraints. In the U.S., refer to the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website to locate the nearest child safety seat inspection station. For

CPST availability in Canada, check with Transport

Canada or the Provincial Ministry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within the Child

Restraint

{ WARNING:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint.

Where to Put the Restraint

According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position.

We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts.

2-43

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (44,1)

A label on the sun visor says, “ Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front.

” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.

The vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensing system, if equipped, has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.

No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.

(Continued)

WARNING: (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

See

Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 68

for additional information.

If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.

When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size, and some may fit in certain seating positions better than others. Always make sure the child restraint is properly secured.

2-44

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (45,1)

Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint, you may not be able to access adjacent safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child restraints.

Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the safety belt.

Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH)

The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.

The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments. The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments.

2-45

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor

Black plate (46,1)

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.

There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (B).

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor.

2-46

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (47,1)

Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor

Locations

j (Lower Anchor):

Seating positions with two lower anchors.

i

(Top Tether Anchor):

Seating positions with top tether anchors.

Front Passenger

Seat — Panel and Rear

Seat Delete Models i

(Top Tether Anchor):

Seating position with a top tether anchor.

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each seating position with lower anchors has two labels near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.

Rear Seat

2-47

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

To assist you in locating the top tether anchors, this symbol is located next to each top tether anchor.

Black plate (48,1)

On vehicles equipped with rear seats, the top tether anchor symbols for the rear outboard positions are on the lower side of the quarter panels. The top tether anchor symbols for the rear center position are on the storage compartment and cargo mat, if equipped.

On vehicles without rear seats, the top tether anchor symbol is on the lower side of the quarter on the passenger side, behind the second row door.

If the vehicle is a panel van equipped with a cargo partition, see the “ Cargo Partition Owner Manual

Supplement ” for the top tether anchor location and routing instructions.

Vehicles with Rear Seats

The rear outboard top tether anchors are located on the cargo floor behind the rear seats.

The rear center top tether anchor is located in a storage compartment behind the rear seats. Lift the lid of the storage compartment to access the anchor. You may have to fold back the cargo mat to access the storage compartment and the top tether anchor for the rear center seating position.

2-48

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (49,1)

Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.

When the top tether anchor is being used for a child restraint, do not use the same anchor to secure cargo.

Vehicles without Rear Seats — Panel and Rear Seat

Delete Models

If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, there is an exposed top tether anchor for the front passenger position located on the rear passenger side cargo floor, behind the second row door.

If the vehicle is a panel van equipped with a cargo partition, see the “ Cargo Partition Owner Manual

Supplement ” for the top tether anchor location and routing instructions.

Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.

When the top tether anchor is being used for a child restraint, do not use the same anchor to secure cargo.

Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached.

According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See

Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 ‑ 43

for additional information.

2-49

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (50,1)

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System

{ WARNING:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Install a

LATCH-type child restraint properly using the anchors, or use the vehicle safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING:

Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if the vehicle has one, after the child restraint has been installed.

2-50

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (51,1)

Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle ’ s safety belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position, before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.

Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual.

1. 1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position.

1. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

1. 3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.

Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps:

2. 1. To secure a child restraint in the rear center seating position, find the storage compartment behind the rear seats. You may have to fold back the cargo mat to access the storage compartment and the top tether anchor.

Lift the lid of the storage compartment to access the top tether anchor for the rear center seating position.

2. 2. To secure a child restraint in the rear outboard seating positions, find the top tether anchor located on the cargo floor behind the rear seats.

Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.

2-51

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

2. 3. To secure a child restraint in the front passenger position, only if your vehicle does not have rear seats, find the top tether anchor located on the passenger side cargo floor behind the second row door.

Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.

2. 4. If the vehicle is a panel van equipped with a cargo partition, see the “ Cargo Partition

Owner Manual Supplement ” for the top tether anchor location and routing instructions.

2. 5. If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint , raise it.

Black plate (52,1)

2. 6. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:

If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback.

If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback.

2-52

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (53,1)

If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts.

If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether around the headrest or head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the LATCH path and attempt to move it side ‐ to ‐ side and back ‐ and ‐ forth. There should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement, for proper installation.

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position

When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2 ‑ 45

for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2 ‑ 45

for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.

2-53

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read

Where to Put the

Restraint on page 2 ‑ 43

.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

Black plate (54,1)

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

2-54

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (55,1)

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 4 and 5.

2-55

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (56,1)

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See

Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2 ‑ 45

for more information.

7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side ‐ to ‐ side and back ‐ and ‐ forth.

When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.

If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position

This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See

Where to

Put the Restraint on page 2 ‑ 43 .

In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.

See

Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 68

and

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 ‑ 27

for more information, including important safety information.

2-56

A label on the sun visor says, “ Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.

” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.

The vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensing system, if equipped, has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.

No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.

(Continued)

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (57,1)

WARNING: (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

See

Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 68

for additional information.

If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accomodate a rear ‐ facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2 ‑ 45

for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see

Lower

Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2 ‑ 45

for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

2-57

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (58,1)

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.

2-58

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (59,1)

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.

7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and your child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See

Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2 ‑ 45

for more information.

8. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side ‐ to ‐ side and back ‐ and ‐ forth.

When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing system, and the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and say lit when you start the vehicle.

If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see “ If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child

Restraint ” under

Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 68

for more information.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.

If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

2-59

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (60,1)

Airbag System

The vehicle has the following airbags:

.

.

A frontal airbag for the driver.

A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

The vehicle may have the following airbags:

.

.

A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver.

A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind that passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word

AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.

With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim.

Even if you do not have a right front passenger seat in your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag in the right side of the instrument panel. Do not place cargo in front of this airbag.

{ WARNING:

Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating airbag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects away from the area in which an airbag would inflate. For more information, see

Where Are the Airbags? on page 2 ‑ 63

and

Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23

.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

2-60

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See

When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 2 ‑ 64

.

Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are

“ supplemental restraints ” to the safety belts.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

Black plate (61,1)

{ WARNING:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.

Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with roof-rail airbags.

2-61

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (62,1)

{ WARNING:

Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see

Older Children on page 2 ‑ 34

or

Infants and Young Children on page 2 ‑ 38 .

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See

Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 ‑ 26

for more information.

2-62

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Where Are the Airbags?

Black plate (63,1)

The driver's frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger's airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger's side.

2-63

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (64,1)

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger, and second row outboard passengers, they are in the ceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING:

If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering.

Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?

Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right front passenger's head and chest.

However, they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold.

2-64

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (65,1)

Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.

For example:

.

If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object.

.

.

If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.

If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

.

If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.

Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronic frontal sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags. See

Airbag System on page 2 ‑ 60

. Roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.

In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system's designed threshold level.

The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts.

A roof-rail airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down.

2-65

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (66,1)

For roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?

In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant seating positions.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping

2-66 the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.

The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See

When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 2 ‑ 64

for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts.

What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates?

After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2 ‑ 66 .

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (67,1)

The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING:

When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.

If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features.

{ WARNING:

A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle.

Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag.

.

Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

2-67

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (68,1)

.

.

The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash.

See

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 8 ‑ 16

and

Event Data Recorders on page 8 ‑ 16 .

Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing System

If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator, if equipped, is visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.

In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position, the label on the vehicle's sun visors refer to “ ADVANCED

AIRBAGS ” .

United States Canada

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system check. If you are using remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a distance, you may not see the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.

See

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 ‑ 27

.

The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.

The driver airbag and roof ‐ rail airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

2-68

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (69,1)

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size.

We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says, “ Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.

” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.

(Continued)

WARNING: (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear ‐ facing child restraint, a rear ‐ facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.

2-69

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (70,1)

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if:

.

The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

.

.

.

The system determines that an infant is present in a child restraint.

A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time.

Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. See

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 ‑ 27

.

The passenger sensing system is designed turn on

(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.

For some children, including children in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

{ WARNING:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See

Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 ‑ 26

for more information, including important safety information.

2-70

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (71,1)

If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child

Restraint

If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.

3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position on page 2 ‑ 56 .

5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.

Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See

Head Restraints on page 2 ‑ 2 .

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child's seating posture and body build. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

If no rear seat is available, do not install a child restraint in this vehicle.

2-71

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (72,1)

If the Off Indicator is Lit for an

Adult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.

If this happens, use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.

4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit.

Additional Factors Affecting System

Operation

Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See “ Safety Belts ” and “ Child Restraints ” in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use.

2-72

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (73,1)

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates.

We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle. See

Adding Equipment to

Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2 ‑ 74

for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates.

A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger sensing system. Here is how:

.

.

The passenger sensing system may turn off the passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the seat. If this happens, the off indicator will be lit, and the airbag readiness light on the instrument panel will also be lit.

Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked in may make it more likely that the passenger sensing system will enable (turn on) the passenger airbag while a child restraint or child occupant is on the seat. If the passenger airbag is turned on, the on indicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat immediately. If the airbag readiness light is lit, do not install a child restraint or allow anyone to occupy the seat. See

Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 ‑ 26

for important safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.

{ WARNING:

Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system.

2-73

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (74,1)

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle

Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.

There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see

Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8 ‑ 14

.

{ WARNING:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end or side sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from working properly. Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.

2-74

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (75,1)

In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position, which includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system.

This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See

Passenger Sensing

System on page 2 ‑ 68

.

If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.

The phone numbers and addresses for Customer

Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer

Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See

Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8 ‑ 2 .

If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see

Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 6 ‑ 68

for additional important information.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this will affect my airbag system?

A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.

The phone numbers and addresses for Customer

Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer

Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See

Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8 ‑ 2 .

In addition, your dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.

2-75

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (76,1)

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety Belts

Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are all working properly.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.

See

Safety Belt Reminders on page 4 ‑ 25

for more information.

Keep safety belts clean and dry. See

Care of Safety

Belts on page 6 ‑ 96

.

Airbags

The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See

Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 ‑ 26

for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbag modules, see

What Makes an

Airbag Inflate? on page 2 ‑ 66 . See your dealer for

service.

2-76

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (77,1)

Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash

{ WARNING:

A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.

If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?

After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced.

If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used at the time of the crash.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section.

Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are driving. See

Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 ‑ 26 .

2-77

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

2 NOTES

Black plate (78,1)

2-78

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Section 3 Features and Controls

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Rear Side Cargo Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

PASS-Key

®

III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . 3-20

PASS-Key ® III+ Electronic Immobilizer

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Automatic Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Manual Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) . . . 3-34

Shifting Out of Park (Automatic

Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Parking the Vehicle (Manual Transmission) . . . . 3-36

3-1

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

Section 3 Features and Controls

Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Object Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Floor Console Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Rear Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover . . . . . . 3-48

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Hideaway Rear Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

3-2

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Keys

{ WARNING:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. Children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

Black plate (3,1)

The key can be used for the ignition and the driver's door lock.

The key has a transponder in the key head that matches a decoder in the vehicle's steering column.

If a replacement key or any additional keys are needed, you must purchase it from your dealer.

3-3

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.

Notice: If the keys get locked in the vehicle, it may have to be damaged to get them out. Always carry a spare key.

If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside

Assistance. See

Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7

for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

See

Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 18

for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry

Canada Standards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range, try this:

.

Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.

.

Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

.

.

Check the transmitter's battery. See “ Battery

Replacement ” later in this section.

If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.

3-4

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions work up to 60 feet (18 m) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter. See

Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) System on page 3 ‑ 4

.

With Remote Start and Remote Rear Doors

Shown, Without Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this feature, press to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See

Remote Vehicle

Start on page 3 ‑ 7

for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. The interior lamps turn off after all of the doors are closed.

If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps to indicate locking has occurred. See “ LOCK HORN ” under

DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 ‑ 46

for more information.

Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.

See

Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3 ‑ 19

.

K

(Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.

If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps to indicate unlocking has occurred. See “ UNLOCK HORN ” under

DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 ‑ 46

for more information. If K is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors and the liftgate unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred and the high beams and parking lamps may turn on and stay on for 20 seconds or until a door is opened. See LIGHT FLASH and EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS under

DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 ‑ 46

for additional information.

L

(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release to activate the vehicle locate feature. The horn chirps three times and the headlamps and parking lamps flash three times.

3-5

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

Press and hold L for three seconds to sound the panic alarm. The horn chirps and the headlamps and parking lamps flash for 30 seconds. Press L again to cancel the panic alarm.

Remote Rear Door Operation (Panel)

* : Press and hold for about one second to open the rear driver side door.

+

: Press and hold for about one second to open the rear passenger side door.

Programming Transmitters to the

Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer.

When the replacement transmitter is programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT LOW message displays in the DIC. See “ KEY FOB BATT

LOW ” under

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for additional information.

Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object inserted into the notch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.

3-6

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.

Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter back together.

Remote Vehicle Start

Your vehicle may have a remote start feature. This feature allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. It may also start the vehicle's heating or air conditioning systems. See

Climate Control System on page 4 ‑ 18

for additional information.

Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so. Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE transmitter functions will have an increased range of operation. However, the range may be less while the vehicle is running.

There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter, see

Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) System on page 3 ‑ 4

for additional information.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This button will be on the

RKE transmitter if you have remote start.

To start the engine using the remote start feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter's lock button, then immediately press and hold the remote vehicle start button for four seconds or until the vehicle's turn signal lamps flash.

When the vehicle's engine starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the engine is running. The vehicle's doors will be locked.

3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is still running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.

3-7

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

After a remote start, the engine will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle's key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to ON/RUN.

The maximum number of remote starts between ignition cycles with the key is two.

If the remote start procedure is used again before the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the first 10 minutes will immediately expire and the second 10 minute time frame will start.

After your vehicle's engine has been started two times using the remote start button, the vehicle's ignition switch must be turned to ON/RUN and then back to

LOCK/OFF using the key before the remote start procedure can be used again.

To manually shut off the engine after a remote start:

.

Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off.

.

.

Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See

Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 .

Insert the vehicle's key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to ON/RUN and then back to

LOCK/OFF.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:

.

.

The vehicle's key is in the ignition.

The vehicle's hood is open

.

.

.

.

.

The hazard warning flashers are on.

There is an emission control system malfunction.

See

Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 ‑ 34

.

The engine coolant temperature is too high.

The oil pressure is low.

Two remote vehicle starts have already been provided.

3-8

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{ WARNING:

.

.

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.

Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it.

(Continued)

WARNING: (Continued)

.

Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehicle. Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

To lock the driver's door from the outside, turn the key clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the key counterclockwise.

You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock and unlock the doors.

From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each door or the power door lock switch to lock and unlock all doors.

3-9

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switches are located on the driver's and front passenger's door next to the door handle.

Driver's side shown,

Passenger's side similar

Press the top of the switch to unlock the doors. Press the bottom of the switch to lock the doors.

Delayed Locking

This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors and liftgate when the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.

If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking feature is active. Five seconds after the last door is closed, all of the doors and liftgate will lock.

The turn signal lamps will flash to indicate that the doors have been locked. To cancel the delay and lock the doors immediately, press the lock button a second time.

If the key is in the ignition this feature will not lock the doors.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), you can disable this function. See

DIC Vehicle

Personalization on page 4 ‑ 46 .

Automatic Door Lock

On vehicles with power door locks, the doors automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out of (P) Park for a vehicle with an automatic transmission.

For a vehicle with a manual transmission, the speed must be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled.

3-10

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Programmable Automatic Door

Unlock

Your vehicle will automatically unlock all doors when the shift lever is moved into (P) Park for a vehicle with an automatic transmission, and when the ignition is turned off for a vehicle with a manual transmission.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), the doors can be programmed to automatically unlock several ways for vehicles with an automatic transmission. See

DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 ‑ 46

for more information.

Rear Door Security Locks

Vehicles with rear door security locks prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.

On vehicles with this feature, the rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors to access them.

To set the security locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the lock below the rear door security lock label and turn it to the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.

3-11

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

To open a rear door while the security lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the power door lock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the lock below the rear door security lock label and turn it to the vertical position.

3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.

Lockout Protection

If you press the power door lock switch when the key is in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will lock and the driver's door will unlock. Be sure to remove the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.

The lockout protection can be overridden by pressing and holding the power door lock in the lock position for three seconds.

Rear Side Cargo Door

The rear side cargo doors can be opened by pressing the buttons located on the driver and passenger sides of the instrument panel, or by using the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter. See

Instrument Panel on page 1 ‑ 2

, and

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation on page 3 ‑ 5

for more information.

To use the buttons on the instrument panel, the driver side door must be unlocked.

Push the door to close.

Liftgate

To lock the liftgate from the outside, press the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

To unlock the liftgate with the RKE, press the unlock button twice within five seconds. For more information, see

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 5

. You can also use the power door lock switch to lock and unlock the liftgate.

Open the liftgate by pressing the touchpad located in the handle above the license plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise by itself. Lamps in the rear of the vehicle will come on, illuminating the rear cargo area, unless the dome lamp lever is in the off position.

For more information, see

Dome Lamp on page 4 ‑ 14 .

3-12

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass.

Always check to make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it.

{ WARNING:

Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

WARNING: (Continued)

.

.

.

If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

Close all of the windows.

Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.

Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate

Control System in the Index.

.

If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function.

For more information about carbon monoxide, see

Engine Exhaust on page 3 ‑ 37 .

3-13

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Manual Liftgate Release

To manually open the liftgate, do the following:

Black plate (14,1)

2. Locate the release lever on the latch.

The lever is located about three inches (7.62 cm) behind the trim in the access hole.

1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the liftgate near the center.

3-14

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Push the release lever rearward.

3. Insert a tool into the access hole.

4. The liftgate will unlatch when the lever is pushed rearward. Push the liftgate to open.

5. Reinstall the trim plug.

3-15

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Windows

{ WARNING:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.

They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

Black plate (16,1)

The vehicle aerodynamics are designed to improve fuel economy performance. This may result in a pulsing sound when either rear window is down and the front windows are up. To reduce the sound, open either a front window or the sunroof (if equipped).

3-16

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Power Windows

{ WARNING:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons. Children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows.

Driver's Side Shown

The power window controls are located on each of the side doors. The driver's door also has switches that control the passenger and rear windows.

Press the switch to lower the window. Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window.

The power windows work when the ignition has been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN or when

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3 ‑ 26

.

3-17

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

Express-Down Window

The driver's window switch has an express-down feature that allows the window to be lowered without holding the switch. Press the switch part way, and the driver's window will open a small amount. Press the switch down all the way, release it, and the window will go down automatically.

To stop the window while it is lowering, press and release the top of, or pull up on the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating the windows. Press the lockout button, located with the power window switches, to turn the feature on and off.

When the red band on the button is showing, the lockout feature is off.

Sun Visors

To block out glare, swing down the visor(s). The sun visors can also be detached from the center mount and swung out to cover the side windows. They can also be slid along the rod to cover different areas of the front window.

Visor Vanity Mirrors

Your vehicle has visor vanity mirrors. Swing down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose the mirror.

3-18

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Theft-Deterrent Systems

This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they do not make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-Deterrent

Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm system.

Arming the System

To arm the system:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Press lock on the RKE transmitter.

The system will arm after either of the following occur:

.

.

30 seconds after all the doors are closed.

60 seconds with any door open.

Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter a second time, while all the doors are closed, to immediately arm the system. The system still arms in 60 seconds if a door is open. When the open door is closed, it also arms.

The security light turns on to indicate that arming has been initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light flashes once every three seconds.

If the security light flashes twice per second, a door is open.

Locking the vehicle with the manual lock knobs on the doors will not arm the system.

Disarming the System

Disarm the system by doing any one of the following:

.

Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.

.

Turn the ignition on.

Once the system is disarmed, the security light stops flashing.

3-19

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

How the System Alarm is Activated

If the system is armed, it can be activated by either:

.

Opening the driver's door or tailgate. This causes a

10 second pre-alarm chirp followed by a 30 second full alarm of horn and lights.

.

Opening any other door. This immediately causes a full alarm of horn and lights for 30 seconds.

When an alarm event has finished, the system re-arms itself automatically.

How to Turn Off the System Alarm

To turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:

.

.

.

Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The system will then re-arm itself.

Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.

This will also disarm the system.

Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will also disarm the system.

How to Detect a Tamper Condition

The content theft security system alarm was previously activated if three chirps sound when you press the lock or unlock buttons on the RKE transmitter.

PASS-Key

®

Immobilizer

III+ Electronic

See

Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 18

for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry

Canada Standards RSS-210/220/310.

PASS-Key

®

III+ Electronic

Immobilizer Operation

Your vehicle has PASS-Key

®

III+ (Personalized

Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.

PASS-Key

®

III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition.

You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.

The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.

When the PASS-Key

®

III+ system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes.

3-20

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not start and the security light comes on, there may be a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuse, see

Fuses and

Circuit Breakers on page 6 ‑ 103

. If the engine still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service.

If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.

See your dealer who can service the PASS-Key

®

III+ to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact

Roadside Assistance. See

Roadside Assistance

Program on page 8 ‑ 7 , for more information.

It may be possible for the PASS-Key

®

III+ decoder to

“ learn ” the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.

The following procedure is for programming additional keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key ® III+ to have keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can service

PASS-Key

®

III+ to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has a

1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key to

LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the

ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.

The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key ® III+ key, see your dealer or a locksmith who can service

PASS-Key

®

III+ to have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

3-21

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

Starting and Operating Your

Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:

.

Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).

Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.

.

Avoid making hard stops for the first

200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement.

Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings.

.

Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See

Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 31

or

Towing a Trailer (Manual

Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 37

for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information.

Following break ‐ in, engine speed and load can be gradually increased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four different positions.

In order to shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in

ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must be applied.

3-22

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer.

9 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped, turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See

Retained Accessory Power

(RAP) on page 3 ‑ 26 .

This position locks the steering column when the key is removed. The key can only be removed in LOCK/OFF.

On vehicles with a manual transmission, the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK/OFF in any shift lever position.

Do not turn the engine off when the vehicle is moving.

This will cause a loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags.

In an emergency, if the vehicle must be shut off while driving:

1. Brake using a firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to Neutral. This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting to Neutral, firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shift to P (Park) with an automatic transmission, or Neutral with a manual transmission. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. See

Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 33

.

{ WARNING:

Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency.

5. If the vehicle must be shut off while driving, turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

3-23

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (24,1)

The steering can bind with the wheel turned off center.

If this happens, move it from right to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work, then the vehicle needs service.

{ WARNING:

If you have a manual transmission removing the key from the ignition switch will lock the steering column and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position operates some of the electrical accessories. It unlocks the steering wheel and ignition.

R (ON/RUN): This is the position in which you can operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights.

The switch stays in this position when the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or

ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to ON/RUN for driving.

A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened, the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or ACC/

ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition.

3-24

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Column Lock Release

For vehicles with an automatic transmission, the following procedure allows the ignition to be turned to LOCK/OFF and ignition key to be removed in case of a dead battery or low voltage battery.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).

Black plate (25,1)

2. Remove the cover from the bottom of the steering column.

3. Locate the plunger.

4. Press and hold the plunger while turning the ignition key to LOCK/OFF. Remove the key.

Have the vehicle serviced at your dealer as soon as possible.

3-25

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (26,1)

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

These vehicle accessories may be used for up to

10 minutes after the engine is turned off.

.

Audio System

.

.

Power Windows, if equipped

Sunroof, if equipped

The power windows and sunroof will continue to work for up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened.

The radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN or

ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from

ON/RUN to OFF/LOCK, the radio will continue to work for 10 minutes or until the driver's door is opened.

Starting the Engine

Place the transmission in the proper gear.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start in any other position. To restart the vehicle when it is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to the floor and start the engine. The vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the engine warms. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking

System. This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components. If the ignition key is turned to the START position, and then released when the engine begins cranking, the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running. Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.

3-26

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (27,1)

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5 ‐ 10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or − 18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in

START for a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least

15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, repeat the procedure. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you do not, the engine might not perform properly. Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine Coolant Heater

The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm ‐ up in cold weather condition at or below − 18°C (0°F).

Vehicles with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above − 18°C (0°F).

3-27

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (28,1)

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The electrical cord is located on the passenger side of the vehicle near the headlamp and the radiator.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.

You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least

15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts, to prevent damage.

The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this.

Automatic Transmission Operation

If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift lever is located on the console between the seats.

There are several different positions for the automatic transmission.

P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily.

3-28

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (29,1)

{ WARNING:

It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.

You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See

Shifting Into

Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 3 ‑ 34 .

If you are pulling a trailer, see

Towing a Trailer

(Automatic Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 31

or

Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 37

.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully apply the regular brakes first and then press the shift lever button before the vehicle can shift from P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If the vehicle cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and then move the shift lever into another gear. See

Shifting Out of Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 3 ‑ 36

.

R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission.

The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see

If

Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5 ‑ 22

.

3-29

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (30,1)

N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.

{ WARNING:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is for normal driving with the automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel economy. If you need more power for passing and you are:

.

.

Going less than about 55 km/h (35 mph), push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.

Going about 55 km/h (35 mph), push the accelerator all the way down.

3-30

Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding, see “ Skidding ” under

Loss of Control on page 5 ‑ 15 .

I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.

If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, this position can be used to prevent repetitive types of shifts. You might choose

I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads and when towing a trailer, so that there is less shifting between gears.

PERFORMANCE SHIFTING: If the vehicle has this feature, it can detect a change in driving patterns while in the Intermediate position. If you make an aggressive driving maneuver, the vehicle's transmission automatically shifts to the lowest possible gear to maximize vehicle performance. The vehicle will automatically return to normal operation when you return to normal driving patterns.

L (Low): This position reduces vehicle speed more than

I (Intermediate) without actually using the brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.

If the shift lever is put in L (Low), the transmission will not shift into L (Low) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (31,1)

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Manual Transmission Operation

This is the shift pattern.

Here is how to operate the manual transmission:

Notice: Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while driving. The pressure could cause premature wear in the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).

Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) when the vehicle is traveling less than 32 km/h (20 mph). If you have come to a complete stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the shift lever in N (Neutral) and let up on the clutch pedal. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): Shift into 3 (Third),

4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth) the same way you do for

2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal down.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to

N (Neutral).

N (Neutral): Use this position when you start or idle the engine.

3-31

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (32,1)

R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch pedal and shift into R (Reverse).

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission.

The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.

Also, use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake, for parking the vehicle.

Shift Speeds

{ WARNING:

If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could lose control of the vehicle. You could injure yourself or others. Do not shift down more than one gear at a time when you downshift.

Up-Shift Light

If the vehicle has a manual transmission, there may be an up-shift light. This light will show you when to shift to the next higher gear for the best fuel economy.

When this light comes on, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions let you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift when the light comes on.

While accelerating, it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator.

Ignore the light when downshifting.

3-32

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (33,1)

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between the front seats.

{ WARNING:

If the front passenger seat back is folded down, the armrest may make it awkward to grab and pull up the parking brake lever. If the lever is not pulled up far enough, the vehicle may roll and you or others could be injured. Move your hand lower on the lever or raise the seat back so that you can set the brake.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See

Brake System Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 29

.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press the release button. Hold the release button in as you move the brake lever all the way down.

3-33

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (34,1)

If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime will sound and a warning message will be displayed when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). See

DIC Warnings and

Messages on page 4 ‑ 41 .

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving.

If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see

Towing a

Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 31

or

Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 37

.

Shifting Into Park (Automatic

Transmission)

{ WARNING:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.

If you are pulling a trailer, see

Towing a Trailer

(Automatic Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 31

or

Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 37

.

3-34

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (35,1)

To shift into P (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake. See

Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 33

for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.

Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine

Running (Automatic Transmission)

{ WARNING:

It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave an automatic transmission vehicle with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into

P (Park), hold the brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from P (Park) without first pushing the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)

If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift into

P (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).

This is called “ torque lock.

” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver seat. To find out how, see

Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 3 ‑ 34

.

Move the shift lever out of P (Park) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).

3-35

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (36,1)

Shifting Out of Park (Automatic

Transmission)

This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release is designed to:

.

.

Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully released, and

Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park) unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or

ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.

See

Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 36

for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift lever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park), consult your dealer or a professional towing service.

Parking the Vehicle (Manual

Transmission)

Before leaving the vehicle, fully press the clutch pedal down, move the shift lever into R (Reverse), and firmly apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has been placed in R (Reverse) with the clutch pedal pressed down, the ignition key can be turned to LOCK/OFF, then remove the key and release the clutch pedal. See

Manual Transmission Operation on page 3 ‑ 31 .

If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see

Towing a

Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 31

or

Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 37 .

3-36

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Parking Over Things That Burn

{ WARNING:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING:

.

Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death.

.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation

(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).

The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different.

(Continued)

Black plate (37,1)

WARNING: (Continued)

.

.

The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage.

The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired.

.

There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after-market modifications that are not completely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:

.

.

Drive it only with the windows completely down.

Have the vehicle repaired immediately.

Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation.

3-37

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (38,1)

Running the Vehicle While Parked

It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING:

Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains

Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see

Engine Exhaust on page 3 ‑ 37

.

{ WARNING:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in

P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See

Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 3 ‑ 34

.

If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see

Towing a

Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 31

or

Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 5 ‑ 37 .

3-38

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (39,1)

Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror

Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.

If the vehicle has map lamps, press the buttons located at the bottom of the mirror to turn them on or off.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside rearview mirror with a compass and map lights and/or

OnStar

®

.

Vehicles with OnStar have three additional control buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar ® . See the OnStar ® owners guide for more information about the services OnStar provides.

Press the buttons located at the bottom of the mirror to turn the map lights on or off.

O

(On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on or off.

Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation

Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is started.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water.

Compass

Compass Operation

Y / O (On/Off): If the vehicle has one of these buttons, press to turn the compass on or off.

With the compass feature on, each time the vehicle is started, the compass displays the current compass direction after a few seconds.

3-39

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (40,1)

Compass Calibration

If after a few seconds the display does not show a compass direction, (N for North for example), there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.

Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If CAL appears in the compass window, the compass may need to be reset or calibrated.

To calibrate the compass:

1. Make sure CAL is displayed. If CAL is not displayed, press and hold the compass button until

CAL displays.

2. While CAL displays, drive the vehicle in circles at

5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction.

Compass Variance

The mirror is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone eight or drive out of the area, the compass variance needs to be changed to the appropriate zone.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find the current location and variance zone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the compass button until a Z and a zone number displays.

3. Once the zone number displays, press the compass button repeatedly until the correct zone number is reached. If CAL displays in the compass window, the compass may need calibration. See

“ Compass Calibration ” listed previously.

3-40

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (41,1)

Outside Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on the driver door armrest.

2. Press one of the four buttons located on the control pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.

3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.

Keep the selector switch in the center position when not adjusting either outside mirror.

Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return to its original position.

1. Press the left or right side of the selector switch located beneath the control pad, to select the driver or passenger mirror.

3-41

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (42,1)

Outside Convex Mirror

{ WARNING:

A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are.

If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat.

Object Detection Systems

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system.

Read this entire section before using it.

{ WARNING:

.

.

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not replace driver vision. RVC does not:

Detect objects that are outside the camera's field of view, below the bumper, or underneath the vehicle.

Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.

(Continued)

3-42

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (43,1)

WARNING: (Continued)

Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the

RVC screen, or use the screen during longer, higher speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross-traffic. Your judged distances using the screen will differ from actual distances.

If you do not use proper care before backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting in vehicle damage, injury, or death. Even though the vehicle has the

RVC system, always check carefully before backing up by checking behind and around the vehicle.

The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. When the key is in the

ON/RUN position and the driver shifts the vehicle into

R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears on the inside rear view mirror. Once the driver shifts out of

R (Reverse), the video image automatically disappears from the inside rear view mirror.

Turning the Rear Vision Camera System Off or On

To turn off the rear vision camera system, press and hold z

, located on the inside rearview mirror, until the left indicator light turns off. The rear vision camera display is now disabled.

To turn the rear vision camera system on again, press and hold z until the left indicator light illuminates. The rear vision camera system display is now enabled and the display will appear in the mirror normally.

3-43

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located in the rear of the vehicle.

The area displayed by the camera is limited and does not display objects that are close to either corner or under the bumper. The area displayed can vary depending on vehicle orientation or road conditions.

The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.

The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides.

3-44

Black plate (44,1)

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (45,1)

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does Not Seem To

Work Properly

The rear vision camera system might not work properly or display a clear image if:

.

The RVC is turned off. See “ Turning the Rear

Camera System On or Off ” earlier in this section.

.

.

.

It is dark.

The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens.

Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and wipe it with a soft cloth.

.

.

The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer.

There are extreme temperature changes.

The rear vision camera system display in the rearview mirror may turn off or not appear as expected due to one of the following conditions. If this occurs the left indicator light on the mirror will flash.

.

A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal, or no video signal present during the reverse cycle.

.

A fast flash may indicate that the display has been on for the maximum allowable time during a reverse cycle, or the display has reached an Over

Temperature limit.

The fast flash conditions are used to protect the video device from high temperature conditions.

Once conditions return to normal the device will reset and the green indicator will stop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions, the display will be blank and the indicator will continue to flash as long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or until the conditions return to normal.

Pressing and holding z when the left indicator light is flashing will turn off the video display along with the left indicator light.

3-45

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (46,1)

Storage Areas

Glove Box

Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.

Cupholders

There are two cupholders located in the floor console between the front seats. There is also a cupholder for the rear seat passenger located at the rear of the floor console.

Automatic transmission vehicles have a cupholder in front of the shift lever.

Instrument Panel Storage

The vehicle has a storage compartment on the instrument panel above the air vents. Push the button on the compartment to open the cover.

Floor Console Storage Area

There are two small storage compartments on the floor console.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING:

If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the accelerator pedal and/or brake pedal. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal.

3-46

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (47,1)

Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage.

.

The original equipment floor mats were designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats need replacing, it is recommended that GM certified floor mats be purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals.

.

Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over.

.

.

Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.

Use only a single floor mat on the driver side.

.

Do not place one floor mat on top of another.

The driver side floor mat is held in place by a button-type retainer.

Removing and Replacing the Floor Mat

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to unlock and remove.

2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining up the floor mat openings over the carpet retainers and snapping into position.

3. Make sure the floor mat is properly secured and verify that it does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedals.

3-47

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Rear Storage Area

Black plate (48,1)

The vehicle could also have two rear storage areas that can be used for small items.

Rear Compartment Storage

Panel/Cover

The vehicle could have an adjustable panel/cargo cover feature. The panel/cargo cover can be adjusted into four positions.

To use the panel in the lowest position:

The panel can be used in this position if additional space above the panel is needed. Cargo can be placed on top of the panel in this position.

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the lower guides.

2. Slide the panel forward.

3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock it in place.

3-48

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

{ WARNING:

If you were to carry things on the adjustable panel when it is in the upper (cargo cover) or center positions, during a sudden vehicle movement or a crash, those things could be thrown around in the vehicle. You or others could be injured. When it is in the upper or center position, always secure any cargo on the floor beneath the panel/cover.

Black plate (49,1)

To use the panel in the upper position as a cargo cover:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the top guides.

2. Slide the panel forward.

3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock it in place.

3-49

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (50,1)

The center position is with the front corners placed in the lower guides and the rear corners placed in the upper guides. Do not load cargo on the panel in this position.

The last position is with the front corners in the lower guides, panel sideways, closest to the rear seat for subfloor access. Do not drive while the panel is in this position.

There are storage hooks on the bottom of the panel.

The vehicle might have a cargo mat that covers the panel/cargo cover.

Roof Rack System

The vehicle may have a roof rack system.

{ WARNING:

If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the roof rack — like paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven. The item being carried could be violently torn off, and this could cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Never carry something longer or wider than the roof rack on top of the vehicle unless using a GM certified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, the rack can be used to load items. For roof racks that do not have crossrails included, GM Certified crossrails can be purchased as an accessory. See your dealer for additional information.

3-50

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (51,1)

Notice: Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than 75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage the vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests evenly between the crossrails, making sure to fasten cargo securely.

Notice: Loading cargo directly on the roof of the vehicle may cause damage to the vehicle and would not be covered under warranty. Do not place cargo on the roof the vehicle.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo when driving, check to make sure crossrails and cargo are securely fastened. Loading cargo on the roof rack will make the vehicle ’ s center of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control.

If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, occasionally stop the vehicle to make sure the cargo remains in its place.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see

Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23 .

Convenience Net

The vehicle may have a convenience net. The metal rings in the cargo area can be used to attach the convenience net for several uses. The net can be used to attach items secured to the floor, to the rear liftgate or liftgate glass. The net is not for larger, heavier loads.

Hideaway Rear Storage Bins

The vehicle may have two storage bins located in the rear of the vehicle. Pull up on the handles to open and lift the lid. Use the key to lock/unlock the bins.

3-51

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (52,1)

Sunroof

The vehicle may have a power sunroof.

The switches that operate the sunroof are located in the headliner.

There is a rod that hooks into place to prop open the lid.

Push the rod towards the lid to unhook it and lower the lid.

To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be in

ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) must be active. See

Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) on page 3 ‑ 26

.

Express Open: To express open the power sunroof, fully press the driver's side switch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a desired position other than to the express-open position, press the switch again, in either direction, to stop the movement. If the sunshade is in the closed position, it will open with the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.

3-52

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (53,1)

Vent Open: To open to the vent position from the closed position, press and hold the passenger's side sunroof switch forward. The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward to the full vent position. The sunshade must be opened manually.

Express Close: To express close the power sunroof, fully press the driver's side switch forward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a desired position other than closed, press the switch again in either direction. The sunshade must be closed manually.

Close: To close the power sunroof, operate the controls according to one of the following:

.

From the open position, press and hold the driver's side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must be closed manually.

.

From the vent position, press and hold the passenger's side sunroof switch rearward.

Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will then return to the full-open or vent position. To close the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the two options previously described under the “ Close ” feature instructions.

Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the tracks that could cause an issue with sunroof operation, noise or plug the water drainage system. Periodically open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not remove grease from sunroof.

3-53

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

2 NOTES

Black plate (54,1)

3-54

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Section 4 Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Wiper Activated Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Headlamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Battery Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . 4-23

Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . . 4-30

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction

Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4-1

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

Section 4 Instrument Panel

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . 4-32

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

DIC Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Using an MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Bluetooth

®

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

XM ™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Chime Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

4-2

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Instrument Panel Overview

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button located on the instrument panel, to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble.

Press | again to turn the flashers off.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn symbols located on the steering wheel.

Tilt Wheel

The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down.

3. Pull the lever up to lock in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

4-3

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Black plate (4,1)

Turn and Lane-Change Signals

An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change.

The lever on the left side of the steering column operates the following:

G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals

5 3

: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

O : Exterior Lamp Control

Flash-to-Pass.

Information for these features is on the pages following.

Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is complete.

The lever returns to its starting position when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. See

Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6 ‑ 103 .

4-4

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.

This indicator light appears on the instrument panel cluster when the high beams are on.

Windshield Wipers

To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-Pass

To signal to a driver in front of you that you want to pass, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever until the high-beam headlamps come on. Then release the lever to turn them off.

The windshield wiper lever is on the right side of the steering wheel.

Move the lever to one of the following positions:

1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.

6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

& (Delay): Sets a delay between wipes.

6

(Delay/Intermittent Speed Sensitive): When the lever is in the delay position, turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes.

During intermittent wiping mode, the delay cycle time is sensitive to vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed increases the delay cycle time decreases and wiper movement occurs more frequently.

4-5

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

9 (Off): Turns the windshield wipers off.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the lever to release it. Several wipes, hold lever on z and then z longer.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for more than 15 seconds, the vehicle's headlamps turn on automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the wipers are turned off.

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.

See

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 6 ‑ 49

.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.

A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.

Windshield Washer

To wash the windshield, press the button at the end of the lever until the washers begin.

{ WARNING:

In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

When the button is released, the washers will stop, but the wipers will continue to wipe for about three times or will resume the speed being used before.

4-6

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear window washer/wiper button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls.

{ WARNING:

In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

5 (Delay): Press to turn on the intermittent wiping setting that has a longer delay.

Y (Washer Fluid): Press to wash and wipe the window.

The rear window washer uses the same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer. However, the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer. If the windshield can be washed, but not the rear windows, check the fluid level.

Z

(Rear Wiper): Press to turn on an intermittent setting that has a shorter delay.

To turn either of the intermittent wiper settings off, press the opposite side of the button to turn it to the off position. Press the button all the way down on either side to activate an intermittent wiper setting.

4-7

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

Cruise Control

With cruise control, a speed of about 40 km (25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below 40 km (25 mph).

The brake must be applied at least one time, after the vehicle has been started, before cruise control will function.

{ WARNING:

Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel.

J (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system on and off. The indicator light on the button comes on when the cruise control is on and goes off when the cruise control is turned off.

RES+ (Resume): Press briefly to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed, or press and hold to accelerate.

SET − (Set): Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or make the vehicle decelerate.

4-8

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not in use, it could get bumped and go into cruise when not desired. Keep the cruise control switch off when cruise is not being used.

1. Press

I to turn cruise control on. The indicator light on the button comes on.

2. Get to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET − control button and release it. The

CRUISE ENGAGED message appears on the

Driver Information Center (DIC) to show the system is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

When the brakes are applied or the clutch pedal is used, the cruise control is disengaged.

If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction

Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control automatically disengages. See

Traction

Control System (TCS) on page 5 ‑ 8

and

Enhanced

Traction System (ETS) on page 5 ‑ 11 . When road

conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h

(25 mph) or more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previous set speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise

Control

If the cruise control system is already activated,

.

Press and hold the +RES button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached, then release it.

.

To increase vehicle speed in small amounts, press the +RES button. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

4-9

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise

Control

If the cruise control system is already activated,

.

.

Press and hold the SET – button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.

To slow down in small amounts, press the

SET – button on the steering wheel briefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h

(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using

Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon the vehicle speed, load and the steepness of the hills.

When going up steep hills, the accelerator pedal might need to be applied to maintain the vehicle speed. When going downhill, the brake might need to be applied or the vehicle might have to be shifted to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. When the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to end cruise control:

.

To disengage cruise control; step lightly on the brake pedal or the clutch pedal if the vehicle has a manual transmission.

.

To turn off the cruise control, press steering wheel.

I on the

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed is erased from memory by pressing the I button or if the ignition is turned off.

4-10

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Headlamps

The lever on the left side of the steering column operates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions:

5

(Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps and taillamps only.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automatically turns on the Daytime Running Lamps during daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at night.

O (Off/On): This position is the momentary Off/On switch for the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this only works when the vehicles with an automatic transmission are in P (Park) and vehicles with a manual transmission have the parking brake set and the vehicle is not moving.

When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of the switch to off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp

System. An AUTO LIGHTS OFF message displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and a chime will sound. Turning the switch to off/on again will turn the Automatic Headlamp System back on. An AUTO

LIGHTS ON message displays on the DIC. The

Automatic Headlamp System is always turned on at the beginning of an ignition cycle for vehicles with manual transmission.

Wiper Activated Headlamps

The headlamps and parking lamps are activated

15 seconds after the windshield wipers are turned on.

For this feature to work, automatic lighting must be enabled. See

Headlamps on page 4 ‑ 11

for additional information.

When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated headlamps will immediately turn off. They also turn off 15 seconds after the windshield wiper control is turned off.

4-11

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

Headlamps on Reminder

If the drivers door is opened with the ignition off and the lamps on, a warning chime will sound. This indicates that the headlamps are still on.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.

Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument panel. Do not cover this sensor or the headlamps will come on when they are not needed.

The DRL system will make the headlamps come on at reduced brightness when the following conditions are met:

.

.

The ignition is on.

The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.

.

.

The light sensor detects daytime light.

The shift lever is not in P (Park).

While the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker lamps, and instrument panel lights will not be on.

For vehicles with an Automatic Transmission, the DRL system is off any time the vehicle is in P (Park). For vehicles with a Manual Transmission, the DRL system will be off when the vehicle is first started, the park brake is applied, and the vehicle has not moved. The

DRL system on U.S. vehicles can also be turned off by using the off/on switch for one ignition cycle.

The regular headlamp system should be turned on when needed.

Automatic Headlamp System

When it is dark enough outside, the automatic system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, instrument panel lights, and interior switch backlighting.

Do not cover the light sensor, located on top of the instrument panel. If the sensor is covered the headlamps may remain on when they are not needed.

If the vehicle is driven through a parking garage, overcast weather or a tunnel, the automatic headlamp system may turn on.

4-12

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the automatic lamp control system so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system. The automatic lamp control system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than this delay.

If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic lamp system turns on immediately. Once the vehicle exits the garage, it will take about 20 seconds for the automatic lamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position. See

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 ‑ 14 .

To idle the vehicle with the system off, turn the ignition on and turn the exterior light switch to the off/on position. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must stay in P (Park) for this function or the parking brake must be set for vehicles with manual transmissions.

Turn on the regular headlamps when they are needed.

Fog Lamps

For vehicles with fog lamps, the button is located on the instrument panel, to the right of the steering wheel.

The ignition must be on to use the fog lamps.

#

: Press to turn the fog lamps on and off. An indicator light on the button comes on when the fog lamps are on.

The parking lamps automatically turn on and off when the fog lamps are turned on and off.

The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam headlamps are turned on.

Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

4-13

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

Instrument Panel Brightness

The control for this feature is located to the right of the steering wheel and above the radio.

Move the thumbwheel to the left to dim the lights or to the right to brighten the lights.

The dome lamps will turn on when the thumbwheel is moved completely to the right.

Dome Lamp

The dome lamps turn on when any door is opened. To turn on all dome lamps with the doors closed, turn the instrument panel brightness thumbwheel completely to the right. See

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 ‑ 14

.

Entry/Exit Lighting

The lamps inside the vehicle turn on when any door is opened. These lamps will fade out after about

20 seconds after all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. These lamps will also turn on when pressing K or the L on the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

The lamps inside the vehicle will stay on for about

20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition to provide an illuminated exit.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps located on the front and rear dome lamps.

To turn the front reading lamps on or off, press the lamp lens. To turn the rear reading lamps on or off, press the button next to the lamp.

4-14

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Electric Power Management

This vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM), an advanced control system. It estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge and then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in.

When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gauge or voltage display on the Driver

Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of the following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver.

Battery Run-Down Protection

The vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to protect the vehicle's battery.

When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is turned off, the battery rundown protection system automatically turns the lamp off after 20 minutes.

This prevents draining of the battery.

4-15

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

Accessory Power Outlet(s)

Accessory power outlets can be used to connect electrical equipment, such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The accessory power outlets are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls and at the rear of the center console. There may be an outlet in the rear cargo area on the passenger side.

Remove the cover to access and replace when not in use.

{ WARNING:

Power is always supplied to the outlets. Do not leave electrical equipment plugged in when the vehicle is not in use because the vehicle could catch fire and cause injury or death.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could overload vehicle and adapter fuses. If a problem is experienced, see your dealer.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the installation instructions included with the equipment.

See

Add-On Electrical Equipment on page 6 ‑ 102 .

Notice: Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords.

4-16

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Rear Power Plug for Converters

The vehicle may have a power plug connector located in the rear cargo area on the passenger side behind the service panel. The power connector wiring can be accessed by removing the service panel to begin installation.

This plug can be used to supply power to commercial converters and contains four different circuits. The functions of these circuits are as follows; a 40 Amp battery service, a 10 Amp Accessory or Run service, a

15 Amp Delayed Accessory service and a Ground circuit.

{ WARNING:

Power is always supplied to the outlets. Do not leave electrical equipment plugged in when the vehicle is not in use because the vehicle could catch fire and cause injury or death.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery. Power is always supplied to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 40 ampere rating.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the installation instructions included with the equipment.

See

Add-On Electrical Equipment on page 6 ‑ 102

.

Notice: Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords.

4-17

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter

The vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.

To use the lighter, located on the instrument panel below the climate controls, push it in all the way and let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating will not allow the lighter to back away from the heating element when it is hot. Damage from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of

15 amperes.

To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire ashtray and empty it.

Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

Climate Controls

Climate Control System

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with this system.

For vehicles with remote start, the climate control system comes on and uses the prior temperature settings selected before exiting the vehicle.

A. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

C. Air Delivery Mode

Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Outside Air

F. Air Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger

4-18

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

9 (Off): Turn the fan control to this position to turn the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature.

9

(Fan): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. In any setting other than off, the fan runs continuously while the ignition is in ON/RUN. The fan must be turned on to run the air conditioning (AC) compressor.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow inside the vehicle.

To change the current mode, select:

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets.

6

(Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some air directed to the windshield and side windows.

(Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, side window, and floor outlets. In this mode, the system runs the air conditioning compressor. To defog the windows faster, turn the temperature control knob clockwise to the warmest setting.

0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield, with some air directed to the side window and floor outlets. In this mode, the system runs the air conditioning compressor. To defrost the windows faster, turn the temperature control knob clockwise to the warmest setting.

# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days:

1. Select H .

2. Select @ .

3. Select # .

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

Using these settings together for long periods of time can cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle has cooled, turn off the recirculation by pressing the outside air button.

4-19

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so a small amount of water might drip under the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

The air conditioning compressor cannot be turned on when the fan is off.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that recirculation is on.

This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.

The air conditioning compressor also comes on.

Recirculation is not available in floor, defog and defrost modes. If the recirculation button is pressed, the indicator light flashes five times and outside air is delivered. Operation in this mode during periods of high humidity and cool outside temperatures can result in increased window fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select the defrost mode.

; (Outside Air): Press to allow outside air to circulate through the vehicle. An indicator light comes on to show that outside air is on.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.

The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is in ON/RUN.

< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible. An indicator light comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger turns off approximately

15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the defogger only runs for approximately seven minutes before turning off.

If the vehicle speed is greater than 80 km/h (50 mph) and the rear defogger is on, it remains on as long as the speed is greater than 80 km/h (50 mph). The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine.

For vehicles with the remote start feature, the rear defogger automatically turns on if it is cold outside.

When the vehicle transitions out of the remote start mode, the rear defogger turns off. See

Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 5 .

4-20

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal, or anything similar to the defogger grid.

Outlet Adjustment

Turn the outlets and move the outlet vanes to change the direction of the airflow and to open and close the outlets.

Operation Tips

.

Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that may block the flow of air into the vehicle.

.

.

Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system.

Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively.

Passenger Compartment Air Filter

The filter removes dust and pollen from the air which is drawn into the vehicle. Airflow reduction is an indication that the filter needs to be replaced.

The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance. See

Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3

for replacement intervals. To find out what type of filter to use, see

Maintenance

Replacement Parts on page 7 ‑ 10

.

To access the passenger compartment air filter:

1. Open and empty the glove box.

2. Press both glove box stops outward to let the glove box drop open completely.

4-21

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

3. Pull the three tabs of the filter access door down and open the access door downward.

4. Pull the filter out, keeping it upwards.

Install the new air filter with the AIR FLOW arrow pointing downward. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reassemble.

4-22

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

Warning Lights, Gauges, and

Indicators

Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when there might be or there is a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when there might be or there is a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there could be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.

4-23

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Instrument Panel Cluster

Black plate (24,1)

4-24

English Manual Transmission Shown, Automatic, and Metric similar

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (25,1)

Speedometer and Odometer

The speedometer shows the speed in both kilometers per hour (km/h) and miles per hour (mph).

The vehicle's odometer works together with the Driver

Information Center (DIC). Trip A and Trip B can be set on the odometer. See “ Trip Information ” under

DIC

Operation and Displays on page 4 ‑ 39 .

The vehicle does not have to be running to check the odometer mileage. Simply open the driver's door and the mileage briefly displays.

If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the new one will be set to the correct total mileage of the old odometer.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operated with the tachometer in the red warning area, the vehicle could be damaged and the damages would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red warning area.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light

When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light comes on and stays on for several seconds, then flashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on.

4-25

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (26,1)

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light

For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt reminder light, several seconds after the engine is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

Airbag Readiness Light

The system checks the airbag's electrical system for possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see

Airbag System on page 2 ‑ 60

.

The airbag readiness light flashes for a few seconds when the engine is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately.

If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on.

The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt.

4-26

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (27,1)

{ WARNING:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away.

If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag

Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come on. See

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for more information.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator, if equipped, is on the instrument panel. See

Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 68

for important safety information.

In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position, the label on the vehicle's sun visors refer to “ ADVANCED

AIRBAGS ” .

United States Canada

When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a system check.

If using remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a distance, you may not see the system check.

Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).

4-27

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (28,1)

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service.

{ WARNING:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See

Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 ‑ 26

for more information, including important safety information.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with the charging system or it could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on, to turn off the accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.

4-28

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (29,1)

Up-Shift Light

The vehicle may have an up-shift light.

Brake System Warning Light

The vehicle brake system consists of two hydraulic circuits. If one circuit is not working, the remaining circuit can still work to stop the vehicle. For normal braking performance, both circuits need to be working.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.

Have the brake system inspected right away.

When this light comes on, shift to the next higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.

See

Manual Transmission Operation on page 3 ‑ 31

for more information.

English Metric

This light should come on briefly when the engine is started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.

4-29

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (30,1)

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light stays on if the parking brake does not fully release. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it means the vehicle has a brake problem.

If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is fully released. The pedal might be harder to push or, the pedal could go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop. Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or two times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See

Towing Your Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 29

.

{ WARNING:

The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)

Warning Light

For vehicles with the

Antilock Brake System

(ABS), this light comes on briefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.

If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See

Brake System

Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 29 .

For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for all brake related DIC messages.

4-30

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (31,1)

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Indicator/Warning Light

For vehicles with the

Enhanced Traction

System (ETS), this light serves as an indicator and warning light.

See

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5 ‑ 11

and

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for more information.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/

Traction Control System (TCS)

Indicator/Warning Light

The Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system or the Traction Control

System (TCS) indicator/ warning light comes on briefly when the engine is started.

This light comes on briefly while the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off.

If the indicator/warning light is on and not flashing, the ETS system could have been disabled. Check all related Driver Information Center (DIC) messages to determine whether the system has been turned off or if the system is not working properly and the vehicle requires service. If the ETS has been disabled, wheel spin is not limited.

If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the ETS is actively working. The LOW TRACTION DIC message also appears when the system is actively limiting wheel spin.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer.

If the system is working normally the indicator light goes off.

This light, along with the appropriate Driver Information

Center (DIC) messages, indicates when the ESC system and the TCS are working or are disabled.

4-31

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (32,1)

If the light comes on and stays on, the TCS and potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check the DIC messaging to determine which system is turned off, or not working. If the system is not working, the vehicle needs service. See your dealer.

When the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited.

When the ESC system is disabled, the system does not aid in maintaining vehicle directional control.

If the light comes on and flashes, the TCS or the ESC system is actively working. When the LOW TRACTION message appears, the system is limiting wheel spin.

When the ESC ACTIVE message appears, the system is aiding in maintaining vehicle directional control.

See

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5 ‑ 6

and

Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5 ‑ 8

for more information.

See

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for more information on the messages associated with this light.

Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light

This light comes on briefly while starting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer.

If the system is working normally the indicator light goes off.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat. See

Engine Overheating on page 6 ‑ 29

.

The vehicle's engine could be damaged, and it might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with the engine coolant temperature warning light on.

The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on when the engine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See

Engine Overheating on page 6 ‑ 29

for more information.

4-32

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (33,1)

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

The vehicle has an engine coolant temperature gauge.

With the ignition turned to ON/RUN, this gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the tire pressure monitoring system, this light comes on briefly when the engine is started.

If the gauge pointer moves into the red area, the engine is too hot because the engine coolant has overheated.

If the vehicle is operating under normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See

Engine Overheating on page 6 ‑ 29 .

It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated.

Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do, and inflate them to the proper pressure. See

Tires on page 6 ‑ 50

for more information.

4-33

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (34,1)

When the Light Flashes First and Then is

On Steady

This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire

Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a minute and then stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with every ignition cycle. See

Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 ‑ 58

for more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

A computer system called OBD II (On-Board

Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.

It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.

This light should come on when the ignition is on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.

Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on, after a while, the emission controls might not work as well, the vehicle fuel economy might not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance

Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission controls and can cause this light to come on.

Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could also result in a failure to pass a required

Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See

Accessories and Modifications on page 6 ‑ 3

.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp comes on and stays on, while the engine is running, this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required.

4-34

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (35,1)

This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.

A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle.

Diagnosis and service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:

.

.

Reduce vehicle speed.

Avoid hard accelerations.

.

.

Avoid steep uphill grades.

If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.

Turn the vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.

Diagnosis and service might be required.

The following may correct an emission system malfunction:

.

Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See

Filling the Tank on page 6 ‑ 9

. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.

.

Make sure the electrical system is not wet. The system could be wet if the vehicle was driven through a deep puddle of water.

.

Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.

Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See

Gasoline Octane on page 6 ‑ 6 .

If none of the above have made the light turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle. The dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed.

4-35

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (36,1)

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance

Programs

Some state/provincial and local governments may have programs to inspect the on-vehicle emission control equipment For the inspection, the emission system test equipment is connected to the vehicle ’ s Data Link

Connector (DLC).

.

the critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system evaluates critical emission control systems during normal driving. This can take several days of routine driving. If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection, your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. See your dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not pass inspection if:

.

the Malfunction Indicator Lamp is on with the engine running, or if the light does not come on when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN while the engine is off.

{ WARNING:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.

Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced.

4-36

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (37,1)

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.

This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem.

Security Light

For information regarding this light and the vehicle's security system, see

Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3 ‑ 19 .

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on when the fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.

See

Fog Lamps on page 4 ‑ 13

for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use.

See

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4 ‑ 5

for more information.

4-37

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (38,1)

Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on.

Here are four things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with the fuel gauge:

.

At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before the gauge reads full.

.

It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the fuel tank's capacity to fill it.

.

.

The gauge moves a little when the vehicle turns a corner or speeds up.

The gauge does not go back to empty when the ignition is turned off.

For the fuel tank capacity, see

Capacities and

Specifications on page 6 ‑ 108

.

Driver Information Center (DIC)

Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

The DIC display gives you the status of many of your vehicle's systems. The DIC is also used to display driver personalization menu modes and warning/status messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display, located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.

The DIC buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel.

INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through the vehicle information mode displays.

4-38

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (39,1) r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle information mode displays, select a personalization menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning message.

Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the same time for one second, then release the buttons to enter the personalization menu. See

DIC Vehicle

Personalization on page 4 ‑ 46

for more information.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the

DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the following.

Information Modes

INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through the following vehicle information modes:

Outside Air Temperature and Odometer

Press the information button until the outside air temperature and the odometer display. This mode shows the temperature outside of the vehicle in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). The outside air temperature appears on the left side of the DIC display and the odometer appears on the right side of the display.

To change the DIC display to English or metric units, see “ UNITS ” under

DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 ‑ 46

.

TRIP A or TRIP B

Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B display. These modes show the current distance traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at the same time.

To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the reset button for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer is displayed.

FUEL RANGE

Press the information button until FUEL RANGE displays. This mode shows the remaining distance you can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.

4-39

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (40,1)

The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated. The

FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.

MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)

Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG displays. This mode shows how many miles per gallon

(mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is getting based on current and past driving conditions.

To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.

Average fuel economy is then calculated starting from that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it is continually updated each time you drive.

MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)

Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy at a particular moment and changes frequently as driving conditions change. This mode shows the instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per

100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.

AV (Average) SPEED

Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.

This mode shows the vehicle's average speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).

To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.

OIL LIFE

Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.

The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the

Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See

Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16

and

Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3

.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil change. See “ How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System ” under

Engine Oil Life System on page 6 ‑ 20 .

COOLANT

Press the information button until COOLANT displays.

This mode shows the temperature of the engine coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees

Celsius (°C).

4-40

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (41,1)

Tire Pressure

If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System

(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays for the front tires. Press the information button again until LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.

If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving, a message advising you to check the tire pressure appears in the display. See

Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 57

and

DIC

Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for more information.

DIC Warnings and Messages

These messages appear if there is a problem detected in one of your vehicle's systems.

A message clears when the vehicle's condition is no longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.

If the condition is still present, the warning message comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off and back on. With most messages, a warning chime sounds when the message displays. Your vehicle may have other warning messages.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF

This message displays if the automatic headlamp system is disabled with the headlamp switch. See

Automatic Headlamp System on page 4 ‑ 12

for more information.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON

This message displays if the automatic headlamp system is enabled with the headlamp switch. See

Automatic Headlamp System on page 4 ‑ 12

for more information.

BRAKE FLUID

This message displays, while the ignition is on, when the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.

See

Brake System Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 29

for more information. Have the brake system serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

CHANGE OIL SOON

This message displays when the life of the engine oil has expired and it should be changed.

When this message is acknowledged and cleared from the display, the engine oil life system must still be reset separately. See

Engine Oil Life System on page 6 ‑ 20

and

Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3

for more information.

4-41

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (42,1)

CHECK GAS CAP

This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the message off.

COOLING MODE ON

This message may display on some vehicles. Under severe conditions, hot ambient temperatures, steep grades, and towing, your vehicle may experience more transmission shifting. This is temporary and normal under these conditions. This does not require engine or transmission service.

CRUISE ENGAGED

This message displays when the cruise control system is active. See

Cruise Control on page 4 ‑ 8

for more information.

DOOR AJAR

This message displays if one or more of the vehicle's doors are open. Make sure that the door(s) are closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLED

This message displays if the starting of the engine is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.

4-42

ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED

This message displays to inform you that the vehicle has reduced engine power to avoid damaging the engine. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE

If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is assisting you with directional control of the vehicle. You may feel or hear the system working and see this message displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditions may exist when this message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. This message may stay on for a few seconds after ESC stops assisting you with directional control of the vehicle. This is normal when the system is operating. See

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5 ‑ 6

and

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/

Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 31

for more information.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (43,1)

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) NOT

READY

If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this message may display briefly after starting the vehicle if the system's sensors are not yet calibrated.

The system is not functional until the message stops displaying. Adjust your driving accordingly. When the message is no longer displayed, the system is functional. See

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5 ‑ 6

for more information.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF

If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5 ‑ 6

and

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control

System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 31

for more information.

GATE AJAR

This message displays when the liftgate is open.

Make sure that the liftgate is closed completely. See

Liftgate on page 3 ‑ 12

for more information.

ICE POSSIBLE

This message displays when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW

This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in the transmitter. See “ Battery Replacement ” under

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 5 .

LOW FUEL

This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See

Fuel

Gauge on page 4 ‑ 38

,

Fuel on page 6 ‑ 5

, and

Filling the Tank on page 6 ‑ 9

for more information.

4-43

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (44,1)

LOW TRACTION

If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System

(ETS) or Traction Control System (TCS), this message displays and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. This message stays on for a few seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin. See

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5 ‑ 11

or

Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5 ‑ 8

and

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning

Light on page 4 ‑ 31

or

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning

Light on page 4 ‑ 31

for more information.

PARKING BRAKE

This message displays if the parking brake is left engaged. See

Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 33

for more information.

POWER STEERING

This message displays if a problem has been detected with the electric power steering. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays when there is a problem with the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.

SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY

CONTROL)

If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this message displays and a chime sounds if there has been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains present. When this message displays, the system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See

Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) on page 5 ‑ 6

and

Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)

Indicator/Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 31

for more information.

If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.

Have the ESC inspected by your dealer as soon as possible.

4-44

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (45,1)

SERVICE TRACTION

If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System

(ETS) or Traction Control System (TCS), this message displays and a chime sounds when the system is not functioning properly. The ETS light or the ESC/TCS light also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains present. When this message displays, the system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See

Enhanced

Traction System (ETS) on page 5 ‑ 11

or

Traction

Control System (TCS) on page 5 ‑ 8

and

Enhanced

Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 31

or

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction

Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 31

for more information. Have the system serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

SVC (Service) BRAKE SYSTEM

This message may display if you have a turbocharged vehicle with Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and if the hydraulic brake boost is not working or is working improperly. Have the brake system serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR

If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System

(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle.

See

Tire Pressure Light on page 4 ‑ 33

. Several conditions may cause this message to appear. See

Tire

Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 ‑ 59

for more information. If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR

If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System

(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle's tires is low. The low tire pressure warning light will also come on. See

Tire

Pressure Light on page 4 ‑ 33

. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See

Tires on page 6 ‑ 50

,

Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23

, and

Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 57 . The DIC also

shows the tire pressure values. See

DIC Operation and

Displays on page 4 ‑ 39

.

4-45

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (46,1)

TRACTION OFF

If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System

(ETS) or Traction Control System (TCS), this message displays and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.

See

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5 ‑ 11

or

Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5 ‑ 8

and

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning

Light on page 4 ‑ 31

or

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning

Light on page 4 ‑ 31

for more information.

DIC Vehicle Personalization

Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to a preferred setting.

All of the features listed may not be available on your vehicle. Only the features available will be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the features were set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from their default state since that time.

To change feature settings, use the following procedure:

Entering Personalization Menu

1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.

To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off.

2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the same time for one second, then release to enter the personalization menu.

If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h), only the UNITS menu will be accessible.

3. Press the information button to scroll through the available personalization menu modes.

Press the reset button to scroll through the available settings for each mode.

If you do not make a selection within ten seconds, the display will go back to the previous information displayed.

4-46

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (47,1)

Personalization Menu Modes

OIL LIFE RESET

When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine oil life system. To reset the system, see

Engine

Oil Life System on page 6 ‑ 20 . See

“ OIL LIFE ” under

DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 ‑ 39

for more information.

UNITS

This feature allows you to select the units of measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle information. When UNITS appears on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings:

ENGLISH (default in United States): All information will be displayed in English units.

METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be displayed in metric units.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature, press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

REMOTE START

If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

When REMOTE START appears on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.

See

Remote Vehicle Start on page 3 ‑ 7

for more information.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature, press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

4-47

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (48,1)

LOCK HORN

This feature, which allows the vehicle's horn to chirp every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LOCK HORN appears on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn will still chirp on the second press.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

See

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 5

for more information.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature, press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

UNLOCK HORN

This feature, which allows the vehicle's horn to chirp on the first press of the unlock button on the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or disabled. When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.

See

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 5

for more information.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature, press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

4-48

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (49,1)

LIGHT FLASH

This feature, which allows the vehicle's exterior hazard/ turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock or unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LIGHT

FLASH appears on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not flash when the lock or unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will flash when the lock or unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

See

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 5

for more information.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature, press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

DELAY LOCK

This feature, which delays the actual locking of the vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY

LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings:

ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door is closed. You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter a second time.

OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

See

Power Door Locks on page 3 ‑ 10

,

Delayed Locking on page 3 ‑ 10

, and

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation on page 3 ‑ 5

for more information.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature, press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

4-49

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (50,1)

AUTO UNLK (Unlock)

This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When

AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings:

ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER: The driver's door will automatically unlock.

NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock. You will need to manually unlock the doors.

If you have a manual transmission vehicle, the door(s) will automatically unlock when the key is turned off.

If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, you can select when the automatic unlocking will occur. See

“ UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transmission Only) ” following.

See

Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on page 3 ‑ 11

for more information.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature, press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic

Transmission Only)

This screen displays only if your vehicle has an automatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL is selected for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When

UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings:

KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is turned off.

SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

See

Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on page 3 ‑ 11

for more information.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature, press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

4-50

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (51,1)

EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS

This feature, which allows the vehicle's exterior perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When EXT

LIGHTS appears on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

See

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 5

for more information.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature, press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in

English.

FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.

SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.

GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.

To select a setting and exit out of the personalization menu mode, press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

Exiting Personalization Menu

The personalization menu will be exited when any of the following conditions occur:

.

A ten second time period has elapsed.

.

.

The ignition is turned off.

The end of the personalization menu list is reached.

4-51

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (52,1)

Audio System(s)

Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features.

{ WARNING:

Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others. Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked:

.

Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system.

.

Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations.

For more information, see

Defensive Driving on page 5 ‑ 2 .

Notice: Contact your dealer before adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the engine, radio, or other systems, and could damage them. Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts, parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle operate through the radio/entertainment system. If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not work. Make sure that replacement or additional equipment is compatible with your vehicle before installing it. See

Accessories and Modifications on page 6 ‑ 3 .

The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With

RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See

Retained Accessory Power

(RAP) on page 3 ‑ 26

for more information.

4-52

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (53,1)

Setting the Clock

Without Date Display

AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD Player

To set the time:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or

ON/RUN. Press

O to turn the radio on.

2. Press

H until the hour begins flashing on the display. Press H a second time and the minute begins flashing on the display.

3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are flashing, turn f to increase or decrease the time.

4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the flashing stops after five seconds and the current time displayed is automatically set.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to

24 hour, press the H button until 12H or 24H is displayed. Once 12H or 24H is displayed, turn the f knob to the desired option to select the setting.

Press the H button again to apply the setting, or let the screen time out.

With Date Display

Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, and

Radio with Single CD (MP3) Player

To set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or

ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.

2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.

3. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs that you want to change.

4. To increase the time or date do one of the following:

.

Press the softkey located below the selected tab.

.

.

Press ¨ SEEK, or \ FWD.

Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date do one of the following:

.

.

Press © SEEK or s REV.

Turn f counterclockwise.

4-53

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (54,1)

The date does not automatically display. To see the date press H while the radio is on. The date with display times out after a few seconds and goes back to the normal radio and time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to

24 hour or to change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press H and then the softkey located below the forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.

2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.

3. Press H again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out.

Radio(s)

Radio with CD (Base)

4-54

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (55,1)

Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio with CD (MP3) similar

The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.

Radio Data System (RDS)

The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast

RDS information. This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down, so that the volume level is consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on the radio display.

4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed

Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select the level of radio volume compensation. The display times out after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

4-55

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (56,1)

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM ™ (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (Base).

Press to choose between FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port or the Radio with CD (MP3).

f

(Tune): Turn to select radio stations.

© SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong signal in the selected band.

.

.

To seek stations, press and release

©

SEEK to go to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold goes to the next station. Press

©

SEEK for a few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then

© SEEK again to stop scanning.

.

To scan preset stations in the selected band, press and hold

©

SEEK for four seconds until a double beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored preset. Press © SEEK again to stop scanning preset stations.

¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong signal in the selected band.

.

.

To seek stations, press and release to the next station and stay there.

¨

SEEK to go

To scan stations, press and hold goes to the next station. Press

¨

SEEK for a few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then

¨ SEEK again to stop scanning.

.

To scan preset stations in the selected band, press and hold ¨ SEEK for four seconds until a double beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored preset. Press ¨ SEEK again to stop scanning preset stations.

4

(Information): For vehicles with the Radio with CD

(Base), press to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off, press

4 to display the time.

4-56

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (57,1)

For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features, press 4 to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA song. Song title information will be displayed on the top line of the display while the artist information will be displayed on the bottom line, it the information is available during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.

When information is not available, “ No Info ” displays.

Storing Radio Stations

Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio stations are stored as either favorites or presets.

Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite

Radio that have a FAV button store radio stations as favorites.

Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering wheel controls. See

Defensive Driving on page 5 ‑ 2 .

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press

FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page.

Each page of favorites can contain any combination of

AM, FM, or XM stations. The current balance/fade and tone settings are also stored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the balance/fade and tone settings to the desired levels.

2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the station.

3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored as a favorite.

To setup the number of favorites pages:

1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.

2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the softkey located below the displayed page numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency tabs and to begin programming favorites.

4-57

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (58,1)

Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and

WMA features): If additional information is available for the current song being played, Auto Text will automatically page/scroll the information every three seconds above the FAV presets on the radio display. By default, Auto Text is enabled.

To change the Auto Text setting:

1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.

2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the radio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ON or OFF tab on the radio display.

If

4 is pressed and the song title or artist information is longer than what can be displayed, the extra information will page every three seconds when Auto Text is activated.

Storing a Radio Station as a Preset

Radios that have numbered pushbuttons store radio stations as presets.

Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on the six numbered buttons.

To store preset stations:

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.

3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 for each numbered button.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The radio may display some or all tones such as BASS,

MID, and TREB.

To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with

CD (Base):

Press turn f until the tone control labels display, then f to change the setting.

4-58

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (59,1)

To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port or the Radio with CD (MP3):

1. Press f until the tone control tabs display.

2. Press the softkey below the desired tab to be adjusted.

3. To increase the level of the bass, midrange, or treble:

.

.

Press ¨ SEEK, or \ FWD.

Turn f clockwise.

4. To decrease the level of the bass, midrange, or treble:

.

Press

©

SEEK, or s

REV.

.

Turn f counterclockwise.

The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange, or treble to the middle position by pressing the softkey below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more than two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level adjusts to the middle position.

The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.

If a station's frequency is weak, or has static, decrease the treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressing f .

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

Depending on which radio the vehicle has, the

Balance/Fade can be adjusted using f or ` .

To adjust balance or fade using f :

1. Press f until the speaker control tabs display.

2. Press the softkey under the desired tab, or continue pressing f to highlight the desired tab.

3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow.

On some radios,

\

FWD and s

REV can also be used to adjust the highlighted level.

4-59

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (60,1)

To adjust balance or fade using ` :

1. Press ` until the speaker control labels display.

2. Continue pressing ` until the desired speaker control label displays.

3. Turn f to adjust the setting. The setting can also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,

\ FWD, or s REV.

The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade to the middle position by pressing the softkey below the

BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level adjusts to the middle position.

The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)

CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button feature.

To select and find a desired category:

1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display the category tabs on the radio display. Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays.

3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired category tab to immediately tune to the first XM station associated with that category.

4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station within the selected category, do one of the following:

.

Turn f .

.

.

Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows on the radio display.

Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.

5. To exit the category search mode, press the

FAV button or BAND button to display the favorites again.

4-60

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (61,1)

Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu. To remove an undesired category:

1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.

2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.

3. Turn f to display the category to be removed.

4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the category name along with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressing the softkey under the Add tab when a removed category displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore

All tab.

Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longer calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must be returned to your dealer for service.

Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK

® system has activated. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer.

XM Satellite Radio Service

For vehicles with XM, it is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and

10 Canadian provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service fee is required to receive the XM service. If XM Service needs to be reactivated, the radio will display “ No

Subscription Please Renew ” on channel XM1. For more information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. And www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM Only

See

XM Radio Messages on page 4 ‑ 71

for more information.

Loading a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As each new track starts to play, the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single

CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller

CDs are loaded in the same manner.

4-61

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (62,1)

Ejecting a CD

Z

EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into the player.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through the tracks on the CD.

¨

SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through the tracks on the CD.

s

REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track displays.

Release to resume playing the track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track displays. Release to resume playing the track.

RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random

Current Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message showing the track number displays when a CD is in the player. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found may display.

4-62

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (63,1)

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc

The radio may have the ability to play an MP3 CD-R or

CD-RW disc. See

Using an MP3 on page 4 ‑ 65

for more information.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:

.

The CD player is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play.

.

.

.

.

.

The road is very rough. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.

A problem may have occurred while burning the CD.

The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

Care of CDs

Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom of a

CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all. Do not touch the bottom of a CD while handling it. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.

Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge.

4-63

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (64,1)

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the CD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the

CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, more than one

CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the

CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “ CD Messages ” earlier in this section.

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such as an iPod ® , laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another audio source.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P (Park). See

Defensive Driving on page 5 ‑ 2

for more information on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm

(1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.

When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.

Additional volume adjustments may have to be made from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or not loud.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable audio device is connected to the auxiliary input. The portable audio device continues playing until it is stopped or turned off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a portable audio device is connected to the auxiliary input. Press again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device may display.

4-64

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (65,1)

Using the USB Port

Radios with a USB port can control a USB storage device or an iPod

® using the radio buttons and knobs.

See

Using an MP3 on page 4 ‑ 65

for information about how to connect and control a USB storage device or an iPod.

USB Support

The USB connector is located on the front of the radio and uses the USB 2.0 standard.

USB Supported Devices

.

USB Flash Drives

.

.

.

.

Portable USB Hard Drives

Fifth generation or later iPod

First , Second, or Third generation iPod nano iPod touch

.

iPod classic

Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from

Apple

® for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using the latest iTunes

® application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying your iPod, go to www.apple.com/support.

Using an MP3

Format

Radios that have the capability of playing MP3's can play .mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can play .mp3 and .wma files that are stored on a USB storage device as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod

®

.

Compressed Audio

The radio can play discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files. If both formats are on the disc, the radio reads all MP3 files first, then the uncompressed CD audio files.

CD

R or CD

RW Supported File and Folder

Structure

The radio supports:

.

Up to 50 folders.

.

.

Up to 8 folders in depth.

Up to 50 playlists.

.

.

.

Up to 255 files.

Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.

Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.

4-65

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (66,1)

USB Supported File and Folder Structure

The radio supports:

.

.

.

Up to 700 folders.

Up to 8 folders in depth.

Up to 65,535 files.

.

.

.

.

.

Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.

Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.

AAC files stored on an iPod.

FAT16

FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored in the root directory when the disc or storage device does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the player advances to the next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Tracks are played in the following order:

.

Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has played, play continues from the first track of the first playlist.

.

Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder. When the last track of the last folder has played, play continues from the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode has been chosen as the default display.

The new track name displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened. The display does not show parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename is not displayed.

4-66

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (67,1)

Preprogrammed Playlists

CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp ™ , MusicMatch ™ , or Real

Jukebox ™ software can be accessed, however, there is no playlist editing capability using the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio with a USB port.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently playing.

©

SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the file displays. Release s REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the file displays. Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays.

S c

(Previous Folder): Press the softkey below S c to go to the first track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T to go to the first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a

CD in random, rather than sequential order. To use random, press the softkey under the RDM tab until

Random Current Disc displays to play songs from the current CD in random order. Press the same softkey again to turn off random play.

h

(Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h to have the files played in order by artist or album. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information.

It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of files on the disc. The radio may begin playing while it is scanning in the background.

4-67

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (68,1)

When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display. Once all songs by that artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired artist displays.

To change from playback by artist to playback by album:

1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from the sort screen.

3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to the main music navigator screen.

The album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play. Once all songs from that album have played, the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.

Connecting a USB Storage Device or iPod

®

The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB storage device.

To connect a USB storage device, connect the device to the USB port located on the front of the radio.

To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable that came with the iPod to the iPod ’ s dock connector and connect the other end to the USB port located on the front of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB connection works, “ OK to disconnect ” and a GM logo may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the radio's display. The iPod music appears on the radio ’ s display and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod automatically powers off and will not charge or draw power from the vehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input

Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.

See “ Using the Auxiliary Input Jack ” earlier for more information.

4-68

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (69,1)

Using the Radio to Control a USB

Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod using the radio buttons and knobs and display song information on the radio ’ s display.

f

(Tune): Turn to select files.

©

SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.

Release

\

FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays.

4 (Information): Press to display additional information about the selected track.

Using Softkeys to Control a USB

Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radio display are used to control the functions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display to display the functions listed below, or press the softkey below the function if it is currently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function on it to use that function.

j

(Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the track. The tab appears raised when pause is being used. Press the softkey below j again to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root directory on a USB storage device.

c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view the contents of the current folder on the USB drive. To browse and select files:

1. Press the softkey below c .

2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.

4-69

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (70,1)

3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the desired folder is reached.

4. Turn folder.

f to scroll through the files in the selected

5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.

To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order:

.

.

First softkey, first item in the list.

Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.

.

.

Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.

Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.

.

Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h

(Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's menu system. Files are sorted by:

.

.

.

Playlists

Artists

Albums

.

.

.

Genres

Songs

Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey below h .

2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.

3. Press f to select the desired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the selected menu.

5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.

To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order:

.

.

.

.

.

First softkey, first item in the list.

Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.

Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.

Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.

Fifth softkey, end of the list.

4-70

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (71,1)

Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below

" or

' to select between

Repeat All and Repeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the default mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat

Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below

>

,

2

,

< or

= to select between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle

Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turn shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the softkey below

= or

< to shuffle all songs on the

USB storage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage device.

XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request, by calling 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and

1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM ™ signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is needed.

This message should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package.

4-71

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (72,1)

Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly.

No Title Info: No song title information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly.

No CAT Info: No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly.

No Information: No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly.

No Subscription Please Renew: XM subscription needs to be reactivated. Contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the

U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in

Canada.

CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received after having the vehicle serviced, check with your dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the XM ™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.

This label is needed to activate the service.

Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver or antenna could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

4-72

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (73,1)

Bluetooth

®

For vehicles equipped with Bluetooth capability, the system can interact with many cell phones, allowing:

.

Placement and receipt of calls in a hands-free mode.

.

To minimize driver distraction, before driving, and with the vehicle parked:

.

Sharing of the cell phone ’ s address book or contact list with the vehicle.

Become familiar with the features of the cell phone. Organize the phone book and contact lists clearly and delete duplicate or rarely used entries.

If possible, program speed dial or other shortcuts.

.

.

.

.

Review the controls and operation of the infotainment system.

Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. The system may not work with all cell phones. See “ Pairing a

Phone ” in this section for more information.

If the cell phone has voice dialing capability, learn to use that feature to access the address book or contact list. See “ Voice Pass-Thru ” in this section for more information.

See “ Storing and Deleting Phone Numbers ” in this section for more information.

{ WARNING:

When using a cell phone, it can be distracting to look too long or too often at the screen of the phone or the infotainment (navigation) system.

Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death.

Focus your attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls. The system can be used while the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.

The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m

(30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle

Bluetooth system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for more information on compatible phones.

4-73

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (74,1)

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.

For additional information say “ Help ” while you are in a voice recognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command. Wait until the tone and then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in ‐ vehicle Bluetooth system, sound comes through the vehicle's front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level. The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the in ‐ vehicle Bluetooth system. See

Audio

Steering Wheel Controls on page 4 ‑ 81

for more information.

b g

(Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls, to confirm system information, and to start speech recognition.

c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a call, or to cancel an operation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See your cell phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone. If a

Bluetooth phone is not connected, calls will be made using OnStar ® Hands ‐ Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner's guide for more information.

4-74

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (75,1)

Pairing Information

.

Up to five cell phones can be paired to the

Bluetooth system.

.

.

.

.

The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving.

Pairing only needs to be completed once, unless the pairing information on the cell phone changes or the cell phone is deleted from the system.

Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the Bluetooth system at a time.

If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the first available paired cell phone in the order that they were first paired to the system. To link to a different paired phone, see “ Linking to a Different Phone ” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Bluetooth ” .

3. Say “ Pair ” . The system responds with instructions and a four ‐ digit PIN number. The PIN number is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on the cell phone that you want to pair. For help with this process, see your cell phone manufacturers user guide.

5. Locate the device named “ Your Vehicle ” in the list on the cell phone. Follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the PIN number that was provided in Step 3. After the PIN number is successfully entered, the system prompts you to provide a name for the paired cell phone. This name will be used to indicate which phones are paired and connected to the vehicle, see “ Listing

All Paired and Connected Phones ” later in this section for more information.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair additional phones.

Listing All Paired and Connected Phones

The system can list all cell phones paired to it. If a paired cell phone is also connected to the vehicle, the system responds with “ is connected ” after that phone name.

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Bluetooth ” .

3. Say “ List ” .

4-75

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (76,1)

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want to delete is unknown, see

“ Listing All Paired and Connected Phones ” .

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Bluetooth ” .

3. Say “ Delete ” . The system asks for which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone you want to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone, the Bluetooth system looks for the next available cell phone in the order in which all the available cell phones were paired.

Depending on which cell phone you want to connect to, you may have to use this command several times.

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Bluetooth ” .

3. Say “ Change phone ” .

.

If another cell phone is found, the response will be “ <Phone name> is now connected ” .

.

If another cell phone is not found, the original phone remains connected.

Storing and Deleting Phone Numbers

The system can store up to 30 phone numbers as name tags in the Hands Free Directory that is shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems.

The following commands are used to delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store a phone number, or a group of numbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allows a phone number to be stored as a name tag by entering the digits one at a time.

Delete: This command is used to delete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: This command deletes all stored name tags in the Hands Free Calling Directory and the OnStarTurn by Turn Destinations Directory.

Using the

Store

Command

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Store ” .

3. Say the phone number or group of numbers you want to store all at once with no pauses, then follow the directions given by the system to save a name tag for this number.

4-76

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (77,1)

Using the

Digit Store

Command

If an unwanted number is recognized by the system, say “ Clear ” at any time to clear the last number.

To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, say “ Verify ” at any time.

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Digit Store ” .

3. Say each digit, one at a time, that you want to store. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone.

After the last digit has been entered, say “ Store ” , and then follow the directions given by the system to save a name tag for this number.

Using the

Delete

Command

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Delete ” .

3. Say the name tag you want to delete.

Using the

Delete All Name Tags

Command

This command deletes all stored name tags in the

Hands Free Calling Directory and the OnStarTurn by

Turn Destinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Delete all name tags ” .

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all the stored numbers and name tags.

Using the

List

Command

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Directory ” .

3. Say “ Hands Free Calling ” .

4. Say “ List ” .

4-77

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (78,1)

Making a Call

Calls can be made using the following commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or call command can be used interchangeably to dial a phone number or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows a phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time.

Re ‐ dial: This command is used to dial the last number used on the cell phone.

Using the

Dial

or

Call

Command

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Dial ” or “ Call ” .

3. Say the entire number without pausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers.

Using the

Digit Dial

Command

The digit dial command allows a phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number is recognized by the system, say “ Clear ” at any time to clear the last number.

To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, say “ Verify ” at any time.

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Digit Dial ” .

3. Say each digit, one at a time, that you want to dial.

After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone. After the last digit has been entered, say “ Dial ” .

Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers.

Using the

Re

dial

Command

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. After the tone, say “ Re ‐ dial ” .

Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers.

4-78

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (79,1)

Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received, the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

.

Press b g to answer the call.

.

Press c x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported on the cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier.

.

Press b g to answer an incoming call when another call is active. The original call is placed on hold.

.

.

Press b g again to return to the original call.

To ignore the incoming call, no action is required.

.

Press c x to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold.

Three

Way Calling

Three ‐ way calling must be supported on the cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier.

1. While on a call, press b g .

2. Say “ Three ‐ way call ” .

3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of the third party to be called.

4. Once the call is connected, press the callers together.

b g to link all

Ending a Call

Press c x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b g , and then say “ Mute Call ” .

To cancel mute, press

“ Un ‐ mute Call ” .

b g , and then say

4-79

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (80,1)

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred between the Bluetooth system and the cell phone.

The cell phone must be paired and connected with the

Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred. The connection process can take up to two minutes after the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio From the Bluetooth

System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in the vehicle:

1. Press b g

.

2. Say “ Transfer Call ” .

To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth System

From a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on the cell phone, press b g . The audio transfers to the vehicle. If the audio does not transfer to the vehicle, use the audio transfer feature on the cell phone. See your cell phone manufacturers user guide for more information.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass ‐ thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone. See your cell phone manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cell phone:

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.

2. Say “ Bluetooth ” . The system responds “ Bluetooth ready ” , followed by a tone.

3. Say “ Voice ” . The system responds “ OK, accessing

<phone name> ” .

.

The cell phone's normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone's operating instructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)

Tones

The Bluetooth system can send numbers and the numbers stored as name tags during a call. You can use this feature when calling a menu driven phone system. Account numbers can also be stored for use.

4-80

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (81,1)

Sending a Number or Name Tag During a Call

1. Press b g

. The system responds “ Ready ” , followed by a tone.

2. Say “ Dial ” .

3. Say the number or name tag to send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out of the in ‐ vehicle

Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This includes all saved name tags in the phone book and phone pairing information. For information on how to delete this information, see the previous sections on

Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth

® the Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are owned by

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by

General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

See

Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 18

for FCC information.

Theft-Deterrent Feature

TheftLock ® is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on the vehicle's options.

Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.

e + / e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

w

/ x

(Next / Previous): Press to change radio stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and navigate folders on an iPod

® or USB device.

4-81

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (82,1)

To change radio stations:

.

Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous radio station stored as a preset.

.

Press and hold w or x to go to the next or previous radio station in the selected band with a strong signal.

To select tracks on a CD:

Press and release track.

w or x to go to the next or previous

To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:

1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display.

2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down the list, then press and hold w to play the highlighted track.

To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:

1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display.

2. Press and hold folder list.

x to go back to the previous

3. Press and release the list.

w or x to scroll up or down

.

To select a folder, press and hold folder is highlighted.

w when the

.

To go back further in the folder list, press and hold x .

c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a current call.

b g

(Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth

® or OnStar

® systems press and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact with those systems. See

Bluetooth ® on page 4 ‑ 73

and the OnStar Owner's Guide for more information.

4-82

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (83,1)

Radio Reception

Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce these levels during the night. Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.

When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles

(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference, some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM ™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle's radio. This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone's battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.

4-83

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (84,1)

Fixed Mast Antenna

The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged as long as it is securely attached to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.

XM ™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System

The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear radio reception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.

Chime Level Adjustment

The radio may be used to adjust the vehicle's chime level. If the radio can be used to change the volume level of the chime, press and hold the sixth numbered pushbutton or the sixth FAV pushbutton with the ignition on and the radio power off. The volume level changes between Normal and Loud. The selected volume level appears on the radio display.

Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.

4-84

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Section 5 Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Racing or Other Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transmission) . . . . . 5-31

Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) . . . . . . . . 5-37

5-1

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

Your Driving, the Road, and the

Vehicle

Defensive Driving

Defensive driving means “ always expect the unexpected.

” The first step in driving defensively is to wear the safety belt. See

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2 ‑ 15

.

{ WARNING:

.

.

Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready. In addition:

Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you.

Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.

Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, more than

17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with about

250,000 people injured.

5-2

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

For persons under 21, it is against the law in every

U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological, and developmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive.

Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

Control of a Vehicle

The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle. See

Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5 ‑ 8

,

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5 ‑ 11 , and

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5 ‑ 6

.

Adding non ‐ dealer accessories can affect vehicle performance. See

Accessories and Modifications on page 6 ‑ 3 .

Braking

See

Brake System Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 29 .

Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three ‐ fourths of a second. But that is only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in three ‐ fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels

20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.

5-3

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking, rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.

The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.

If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and the 2.0L turbocharged engine, it also has a hydraulic brake boost feature which supplements the power brake system to maintain consistent brake performance under conditions of low brake booster vacuum. Low brake booster vacuum conditions can include initial start up after the vehicle has been parked for several hours, very frequent brake stops, or high altitude driving. When hydraulic brake boost is active, minor brake pulsation or movement might be felt but this is normal. If brake pedal feel changes or the brake pedal feels hard to push, the system might not be receiving the intended brake boost and the SVC BRAKE SYSTEM DIC message may be displayed.

Adding non ‐ dealer/non ‐ retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance. See

Accessories and

Modifications on page 6 ‑ 3 .

Antilock Brake System (ABS)

The vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System

(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid.

If the vehicle has ABS, this warning light on the instrument panel comes on briefly when the vehicle is started.

When the engine is started, or when the vehicle begins to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

5-4

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.

Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as required, faster than any driver could. This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work. A slight brake pedal pulsation might be felt or some noise noticed, but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation that requires hard braking.

If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC) with

Antilock Brake System (ABS), it allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time. However, if the vehicle does not have ESC with ABS, the first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it down — might be the wrong thing to do. The wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot respond to the driver's steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it was headed when the wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very thing the driver was trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If the vehicle does not have ABS, use a “ squeeze ” braking technique. This gives maximum braking while maintaining steering control. Do this by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This helps retain steering control. Without ABS, it is different.

See

Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5 ‑ 4

.

In many emergencies, steering can help more than even the very best braking.

5-5

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

Brake Assist

If this vehicle has ESC with ABS, it also has a Brake

Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle.

The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The vehicle has an Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system which combines antilock brake, and traction and stability control systems that help the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions.

When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt while it is working. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).

If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS light comes on, and the ESC OFF and/or SERVICE

ESC message displays.

For more information, see

Driver Information Center

(DIC) on page 4 ‑ 38

and

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning

Light on page 4 ‑ 31

.

5-6

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

This light flashes on the instrument panel cluster when the ESC system is on and activated.

ESC activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. ESC selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle's brakes to help steer the vehicle in the intended direction.

When the system activates, an ESC ACTIVE message displays on the Driver Information Center. See

DIC

Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41 . This light also

flashes on the instrument panel cluster when the ESC system is on and activated. Noise or vibration may be felt in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the vehicle in the desired direction.

When the light is on solid and the message(s),

SERVICE ESC, ESC OFF, or both display, the system will not assist the driver in maintaining directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.

See

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started.

To assist the driver with vehicle directional control, especially in slippery road conditions, always leave the system on. ESC can be turned off if needed.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system begins to assist the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise control will automatically disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See

Cruise Control on page 4 ‑ 8 .

The ESC/TCS button is located on the instrument panel.

The traction control system can be turned off or back on by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both traction control and ESC, press and hold the button from five to ten seconds.

5-7

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION

OFF and ESC OFF messages appear, and the

ESC/TCS light comes on to warn the driver that both traction control and ESC are disabled.

It is recommended that the system remain on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to “ rock ” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high wheel spin is required. See

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in

Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5 ‑ 22 .

ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light comes on to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and requires service. If the problem does not clear after restarting the vehicle, see your dealer for service. See

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for more information.

Adding non ‐ dealer/non ‐ retailer accessories can affect the vehicle's performance. See

Accessories and

Modifications on page 6 ‑ 3

for more information.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it senses that the front wheels are spinning too much or are beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power by closing the throttle and managing engine spark to limit wheel spin.

This light flashes while the traction control system is limiting wheel spin.

The system may be heard or felt while it is working.

This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle.

See

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control

System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 31

for more information.

5-8

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

If the vehicle is in cruise control while TCS begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See

Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever on page 4 ‑ 4

.

When this light is on and either the

SERVICE TRACTION or TRACTION OFF message is displayed, the system will not limit wheel spin.

Adjust your driving accordingly. See

DIC Warnings and

Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for more information.

The Traction Control System comes on automatically whenever the vehicle is started. It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to

“ rock ” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in off-road conditions where high wheel spin is required. See

If

Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5 ‑ 22

.

To turn the system off or on, press and release the

ESC/TCS button located on the instrument panel.

The DIC displays the appropriate message as described previously when the button is pressed.

5-9

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

Traction Control Operation

Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed management) and by applying brakes to each individual wheel

(brake-traction control) as necessary.

The traction control system is enabled automatically when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION message if it senses that either of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. For more information on the LOW TRACTION message, see

Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4 ‑ 38

.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed to spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and

Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or

SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, the differential could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and this message are displayed.

Notice: When traction control is turned off, or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drive wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels do not have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered. See the warranty book for additional information.

The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction in acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration may be heard. This is normal.

If the vehicle is in cruise control while the system activates, the ESC/TCS light flashes and the cruise control automatically disengages. The cruise control can be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See

Cruise Control on page 4 ‑ 8

.

Adding non ‐ dealer/non ‐ retailer accessories can affect the vehicle's performance. See

Accessories and

Modifications on page 6 ‑ 3

for more information.

5-10

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

The vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System

(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transmission to limit wheel spin.

If the vehicle has ETS, there is not an ESC/TCS button on the instrument panel. To turn the system off, shift to

L (Low) or R (Reverse). There is more information about how to turn the system off later in this section.

The ETS indicator/warning light flashes and LOW

TRACTION appears on the Driver Information Center

(DIC) when the traction control system is actively limiting wheel spin. The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but this is normal. Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the ETS begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See

Cruise Control on page 4 ‑ 8 .

The ETS indicator/warning light may come on for the following reasons:

.

.

The indicator/warning light flashes while the traction control system is limiting wheel spin.

If the system is turned off by moving the shift lever to L (Low), the indicator/warning light comes on and stays on. To turn the system back on, move the shift lever back to a position other than L (Low).

The indicator/warning light should go off.

.

.

The indicator/warning light will come on when the parking brake is set with the engine running, and it will stay on if the parking brake does not release fully. If the transmission shift lever is in any position other than L (Low) and the indicator/warning light stays on after the parking brake is fully released, there is a problem with the system.

If the traction control system is affected by an engine related problem, the system will turn off and the indicator/warning light will come on.

5-11

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

If the ETS indicator/warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the transmission shift lever is in any position other than

L (Low), the vehicle may need service.

When this light is on solid, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

Check the DIC messaging to determine whether it is because of the driver turning off the system, or that the system may not be working properly and the vehicle requires service. When this light is turned on, either the

SERVICE TRACTION or TRACTION OFF message will be displayed.

See

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for more information on the messages associated with this light.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, ETS should always be left on. But the system can be turned off if needed.

To turn the system off, shift to L (Low) or R (Reverse).

When the system is turned off, the ETS indicator/ warning light will come on and stay on and the

TRACTION OFF message will be displayed when the gear shift is in L (Low). The indicator/warning light and message will not come on when the gear shift is in

R (Reverse). If the ETS is limiting wheel spin when the transmission is shifted to L (Low) or R (Reverse) to turn the system off, the indicator/warning light and

TRACTION OFF will come on in L (Low). But the system will not turn off right away. It will wait until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. See

DIC

Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for more information on the messages associated with this light.

The system can be turned back on at any time by shifting to D (Automatic Overdive) or I (Intermediate).

The ETS indicator/warning light should go off.

Adding non ‐ dealer/non ‐ retailer accessories can affect the vehicle's performance. See

Accessories and

Modifications on page 6 ‑ 3

for more information.

Limited-Slip Differential

Vehicles with a limited-slip differential can give more traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle. The limited slip design has minimal impact to the steering feel, but boosts the traction performance under all conditions.

5-12

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Steering

Electric Power Steering

If the engine stalls while driving, the power steering assist system will continue to operate until you are able to stop the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost because the electric power steering system is not functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the stopped position for an extended amount of time, you may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.

The normal amount of power steering assist should return shortly after a few normal steering movements.

The electric power steering system does not require regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system problems and/or the POWER STEERING message comes on, contact your dealer for service repairs. See

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is the one factor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering the curve, while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering around the problem.

5-13

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the vehicle has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels. See

Braking on page 5 ‑ 3

. It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.

The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.

5-14

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

Passing

Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:

.

Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass. If in doubt, wait.

.

Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.

Never cross a solid or double ‐ solid line on your side of the lane.

.

.

.

Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.

When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of Control

Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems — brakes, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

5-15

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) or the Enhanced Traction System (ETS), remember: It helps to avoid only the acceleration skid. See

Traction

Control System (TCS) on page 5 ‑ 8

or

Enhanced

Traction System (ETS) on page 5 ‑ 11 . If the vehicle

does not have TCS or ETS, or if the system is off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.

If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), the

ESC might activate. See

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) on page 5 ‑ 6

.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning

5-16 clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.

If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If the vehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the wheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again.

This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

Racing or Other Competitive Driving

See your warranty book before using your vehicle for racing or other competitive driving. After reviewing your warranty book, please see the GM Performance Parts website or catalog and contact the race sanctioning bodies, for example Sports Car Club of America

(SCCA) or Grand American, for parts and equipment required for racing or other competitive driving.

Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitive driving, the engine may use more oil than it would with normal use. Low oil levels can damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil level often during competitive driving and keep the level at or near the upper mark that shows the proper operating range on the engine oil dipstick. For information on how to add oil, see

Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16

.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

.

.

Drive defensively.

Do not drink and drive.

.

.

.

Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror.

Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead.

Watch for animals.

.

.

.

.

When tired, pull off the road.

Do not wear sunglasses.

Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out.

.

Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or curves.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.

But, as we get older, these differences increase.

A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep ‐ standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING:

Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.

Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.

5-17

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.

This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include:

.

.

Allow extra following distance.

Pass with caution.

.

.

.

.

Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.

Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.

Have good tires with proper tread depth. See

Tires on page 6 ‑ 50

.

Turn off cruise control.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having it serviced by your dealer before departing.

Things to check on your own include:

.

.

Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows clean — inside and outside?

Wiper Blades: In good shape?

.

.

.

.

Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?

Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?

Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to recommended pressure?

Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date maps?

Highway Hypnosis

Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest.

Other driving tips include:

.

.

Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

Keep interior temperature cool.

5-18

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

.

.

Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead and to the sides.

Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in these conditions include:

.

.

Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.

Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission.

.

Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear.

{ WARNING:

If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ WARNING:

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.

.

.

.

Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.

Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your lane (stalled car, accident).

Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

5-19

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick, so there is even less traction.

Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.

If the vehicle has the

Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5 ‑ 8

or

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5 ‑ 11

, it improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off the traction system to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.

The

Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5 ‑ 4

improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be a serious situation. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible, use the

Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7

.

To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:

.

.

Turn on the

Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 .

Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

5-20

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

{ WARNING:

.

.

.

.

Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.

This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:

Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe.

Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there.

Open a window about 5 cm (2 in) on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air.

Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.

Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See

Climate Control System in the Index.

(Continued)

WARNING: (Continued)

For more information about carbon monoxide, see

Engine Exhaust on page 3 ‑ 37 .

Snow can trap exhaust gases under the vehicle.

This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.

You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in the vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of the vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust.

Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm, but be careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat.

Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm also helps.

If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.

This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to save fuel.

5-21

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow

Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5 ‑ 22

.

If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rocking method.

{ WARNING:

If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured.

The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above

55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tire chains on the vehicle, see

Tire Chains on page 6 ‑ 71 .

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out

Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system.

Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear, or with a manual transmission, between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.

Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see

Towing Your Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 29 .

5-22

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

Loading the Vehicle

It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry, the

Tire and Loading Information label and the Vehicle

Certification label.

{ WARNING:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also shorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar

(B-pillar). With the driver's door open, you will find the label attached below the door lock post

(striker). The tire and loading information label lists the number of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory ‐ installed options.

5-23

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (24,1)

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).

For more information on tires and inflation, see

Tires on page 6

50

and

Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6

57

.

There is also important loading information on the Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See “ Certification/Tire Label ” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1.

2.

3.

4.

Locate the statement “ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs ” on your vehicle's placard.

Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “ XXX ” amount equals

1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs (1400

750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5-24

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (25,1)

5.

6.

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity for your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see

Towing a

Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 5

31

or

Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 5

37

for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.

Item

A

B

C

Example 1

Description

Maximum Vehicle

Capacity Weight for

Example 1 =

Subtract Occupant

Weight @ 150 lbs

(68 kg) × 2 =

Available Occupant and Cargo Weight =

Total

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

300 lbs (136 kg)

700 lbs (317 kg)

5-25

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (26,1)

Item

A

B

C

Example 2

Description

Maximum Vehicle

Capacity Weight for

Example 2 =

Subtract Occupant

Weight @ 150 lbs

(68 kg) × 5 =

Available Cargo

Weight =

Total

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

750 lbs (340 kg)

250 lbs (113 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Example 3

Description

Maximum Vehicle

Capacity Weight for

Example 3 =

Subtract Occupant

Weight @ 200 lbs

(91 kg) × 5 =

Available Cargo

Weight =

Total

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

0 lbs (0 kg)

5-26

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (27,1)

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Certification Label

The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The

GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver's door, or on the vehicle's center pillar (B ‐ pillar).

5-27

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the

GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

{ WARNING:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also shorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice:

Overloading the vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

Black plate (28,1)

{ WARNING:

.

.

.

.

.

Things you put inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle.

When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to.

5-28

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (29,1)

Towing

Towing Your Vehicle

Notice: To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground.

Care must be taken with vehicles that have low ground clearance and/or special equipment. Always flatbed on a car carrier.

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. See

Roadside

Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7

.

To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome, see “ Recreational Vehicle Towing ” following.

Recreational Vehicle Towing

Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.

The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.

Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly.

Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing:

.

What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?

Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's recommendations.

.

What is the distance that will be travelled? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

.

.

Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?

See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations.

Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed. See

Before Leaving on a

Long Trip on page 5 ‑ 18 .

5-29

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Dinghy Towing

Use the following procedure to dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with all four wheels on the ground:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY to unlock the steering wheel.

3. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).

4. Release the parking brake.

5-30

Black plate (30,1)

To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is being towed, remove the following fuse from the floor console fuse block: 8 (Ignition Switch, PASS ‐ Key

®

III+).

See

Floor Console Fuse Block on page 6 ‑ 103

for more information.

Remember to reinstall the fuse once the destination has been reached.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded while towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing the vehicle.

Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed from the rear.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (31,1)

Dolly Towing

Use the following procedure to dolly tow the vehicle from the front with two wheels on the ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing.

5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

6. Release the parking brake.

Towing a Trailer (Automatic

Transmission)

{ WARNING:

The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at all. The driver and passengers could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed.

Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with an automatic transmission and the proper trailer towing equipment. If the vehicle is not equipped as stated above, do not tow a trailer. To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “ Weight of the Trailer ” that appears later in this section.

5-31

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (32,1)

Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, cooling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. Also, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:

.

There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you will be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police.

.

Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, transmission or other parts could be damaged.

.

.

.

.

Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.

Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph

(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle's parts.

Do not tow when the outside air temperature is above 100°F (38°C).

Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km) per year.

5-32

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (33,1)

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

.

The weight of the trailer

.

.

The weight of the trailer tongue

The total weight on the vehicle's tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “ Weight of the Trailer Tongue ” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.

Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23

for more information about the vehicle's maximum load capacity.

If using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).

5-33

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (34,1)

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.

After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.

If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum

Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires

Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the

Tire-Loading Information label. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23 . Make sure not to go over the GVW limit

for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

5-34

Hitches

It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.

Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.

.

.

The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.

Will there be any holes in the body of the vehicle after installing a trailer hitch? If there are, then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is removed. If the holes are not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from exhaust can get into the vehicle. See

Engine Exhaust on page 3 ‑ 37 .

Dirt and water can also enter the vehicle.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (35,1)

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1,500 lbs

(680 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.

Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection at the same time.

During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.

This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.

Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.

Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

5-35

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (36,1)

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving on Grades

Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades exceeding 9.6 km (6 miles). Extended, higher than normal engine and transmission temperatures may result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops are very important to allow the engine and transmission to cool.

When towing under severe conditions such as hot ambient temperatures or steep grades, the vehicle may experience more transmission shifting. A COOLING

MODE ON message may also appear in the DIC. This alerts the driver that the shifting mode is in progress and is aiding engine cooling. See

DIC Warnings and

Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

DIC Warnings and Messages for more information.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.

Pay attention to the engine coolant gauge. If the indicator is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning to reduce engine load. See

Engine Overheating on page 6 ‑ 29 .

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING:

Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous. If something goes wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.

5-36

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (37,1)

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:

.

.

start the engine, shift into a gear, and

.

release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer. See this manual's Maintenance Schedule or

Index for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing

The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See

Engine Overheating on page 6 ‑ 29

.

Towing a Trailer

(Manual Transmission)

Do not tow a trailer if the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission.

5-37

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

2 NOTES

Black plate (38,1)

5-38

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

California Perchlorate Materials

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Adding Equipment to the Outside of the

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Gasoline Specifications (U.S. and

Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Manual Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and Parking

Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . 6-46

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up

Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51

Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57

Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58

Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59

6-1

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63

When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68

Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70

Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage . . . . . . 6-80

Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . 6-89

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95

Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96

Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96

Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100

Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100

Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100

Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100

Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101

Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101

Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . 6-102

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103

Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105

Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108

6-2

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Service

For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and Modifications

When non ‐ dealer accessories are added to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non ‐ GM certified parts, including control module modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM dealer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM

Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle on page 2 ‑ 74 .

6-3

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

California Proposition 65 Warning

Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals.

California Perchlorate Materials

Requirements

Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be necessary. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{ WARNING:

.

.

You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.

Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts, and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task.

Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. Metric and English fasteners can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are used, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see

Service Publications

Ordering Information on page 8 ‑ 14

.

This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see

Servicing Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2 ‑ 74

.

6-4

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed.

See

Maintenance Record on page 7 ‑ 12 .

Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle

Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.

Fuel

Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance, we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards developed by auto companies. A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at www.toptiergas.com.

The eighth digit of the Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel. See

Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) on page 6 ‑ 101 .

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See

Fuel E85

(85% Ethanol) on page 6 ‑ 7

. For all other vehicles, use only the unleaded gasoline described under

Gasoline Octane on page 6 ‑ 6 .

6-5

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

Gasoline Octane

If the vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code W), use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock, might be heard when driving. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code U), use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle's acceleration could be slightly reduced, and a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock, might be heard. If the octane is less than 87, you might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.

If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine needs service.

Gasoline Specifications (U.S. and

Canada Only)

At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or

CAN/CGSB ‐ 3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT). We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See

Additives on page 6 ‑ 7

for additional information.

California Fuel

If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions

Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet

California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California Emissions Standards, the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog ‐ check test.

See

Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 ‑ 34 . If this

occurs, return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis.

If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

6-6

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Additives

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing the emission control system to work properly. In most cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.

However, some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean and avoid problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System

Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General

Motors. It is available at your dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.

That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce spark plug life and affect emission control system performance. The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). For all other vehicles, use only the unleaded gasoline described under

Gasoline Octane on page 6 ‑ 6

.

We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a “ renewable ” fuel, meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops.

6-7

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump available. The U.S. Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website

(www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification

D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.

Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet

ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.

To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate. If this happens, switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve starting. For good starting and heater efficiency below 0°C (32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85.

If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible — do not add less than 11 L

(3 gal) when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per liter (gallon) than gasoline, so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline. See

Filling the Tank on page 6 ‑ 9 .

Notice: Some additives are not compatible with

E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system.

Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.

That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty.

6-8

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Fuels in Foreign Countries

Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.

Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.

To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in and release and it will open.

6-9

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow and state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See

Fuel E85

(85% Ethanol) on page 6 ‑ 7 .

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.

The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door.

{ WARNING:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See

Washing

Your Vehicle on page 6 ‑ 97

.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See

Malfunction

Indicator Lamp on page 4 ‑ 34 .

6-10

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

The CHECK GAS CAP message displays on the Driver

Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly installed. See

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41

for more information.

To close the fuel door securely, push the door to the closed position.

{ WARNING:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.

If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.

This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system. See

Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 ‑ 34

.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{ WARNING:

.

.

.

.

.

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

Dispense fuel only into approved containers.

Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground.

Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.

Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.

Do not smoke while pumping fuel.

Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel.

6-11

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Checking Things Under the Hood

{ WARNING:

An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running.

Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Black plate (12,1)

Hood Release

To open the hood, do the following.

1. Pull the interior hood release lever with this symbol on it. It is located to the left of the instrument panel on the driver's side of the vehicle.

6-12

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the secondary hood release lever to the left.

It is located under the front center of the grille.

3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas struts will automatically take over to lift and hold the hood in the fully open position.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower the hood until the lifting force of the struts is reduced, then release the hood to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat the process if necessary.

6-13

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Engine Compartment Overview

Black plate (14,1)

6-14

2.4 L L4 Engine Shown, 2.2 L L4 Engine Similar

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “ Adding

Washer Fluid ” under

Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 ‑ 32 .

B. Pressure Cap. See

Cooling System on page 6 ‑ 24 .

C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “ Checking Coolant ” under

Engine Coolant on page 6 ‑ 25 .

D. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See

Engine Air Cleaner/

Filter on page 6 ‑ 21 .

E. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See

Cooling System

Cooling System on page 6 ‑ 24 .

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “ When to Add Engine Oil ” under

Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16

.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “ Checking

Engine Oil ” under

Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16 .

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See

Brakes on page 6 ‑ 32

and

Hydraulic Clutch on page 6 ‑ 23 .

I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See

Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 36 .

J. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See

Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 6 ‑ 105 .

K. Remote Negative ( − ) Terminal (Out of View).

See

Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 36 .

6-15

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

Engine Oil

To ensure proper engine performance and long life, careful attention must be paid to engine oil. Following these simple, but important steps will help protect your investment:

.

Always use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See

“ Selecting the Right Engine Oil ” in this section.

.

.

Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level. See “ Checking Engine Oil ” and

“ When to Add Engine Oil ” in this section.

Change the engine oil at the appropriate time. See

Engine Oil Life System on page 6 ‑ 20

.

.

Always dispose of engine oil properly. See “ What to Do with Used Oil ” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See

Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14

for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil level reading is essential:

1. If the engine has been running recently, turn off the engine and allow several minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Checking the oil level too soon after engine shutoff will not provide an accurate oil level reading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

6-16

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add 1 L

(1 qt) of the recommended oil and then recheck the level. See “ Selecting the Right Engine Oil ” in this section for an explanation of what kind of oil to use.

For engine oil crankcase capacity, see

Capacities and

Specifications on page 6 ‑ 108 .

Notice: Do not add too much oil. Oil levels above or below the acceptable operating range shown on the dipstick are harmful to the engine. If you find that you have an oil level above the operating range, i.e., the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. You should drain out the excess oil or limit driving of the vehicle and seek a service professional to remove the excess amount of oil.

See

Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14

for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through.

6-17

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oils with the dexos ™ certification mark. Oils meeting the requirements of the vehicle should have the dexos certification mark on the container. This certification mark indicates that the oil has been approved to the dexos specification.

Notice: Use only engine oil that is approved to the dexos specification or an equivalent engine oil of the appropriate viscosity grade. Engine oils approved to the dexos specification will show the dexos symbol on the container. Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

If you are unsure whether the oil is approved to the dexos specification, ask your service provider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils if dexos is unavailable:

In the event that dexos ‐ approved engine oil is not available at an oil change or for maintaining proper oil level, you may use substitute engine oil displaying the API Starburst symbol and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade. Use of oils that do not meet the dexos specification, however, may result in reduced performance under certain circumstances.

This vehicle was filled at the factory with dexos ‐ approved engine oil.

6-18

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity grade for the vehicle.

Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 10W ‐ 30,

10W ‐ 40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below − 29°C

( − 20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should be used.

An oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures.

When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, be sure to always select an oil that meets the required specification, dexos. See “ Specification ” earlier in this section for more information.

Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the dexos specification and displaying the dexos certification mark are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.

Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

6-19

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.

A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See

DIC

Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41 . Change the

oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles

(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and, at this time, the system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.

6-20

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life

System

Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.

2. Press the information and reset buttons on the

Driver Information Center (DIC) at the same time to enter the personalization menu. See

DIC Vehicle

Personalization on page 4 ‑ 46 .

3. Press the information button to scroll through the available personalization menu modes until the

DIC display shows OIL ‐ LIFE RESET.

4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell you the system has been reset.

5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

For vehicles with the 2.2L (VIN Code V) or 2.4L

(VIN Code B) engines, you can also reset the system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, then start the engine.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

When to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi) interval.

See

Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3

for more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. Replace filter if appears dusty or dirty.

6-21

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

How to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter

See

Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14

for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains covered with dirt, a new filter is required. Never use compressed air to clean the filter.

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealer service department.

6-22

To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow sensor, PCV hose, and both ducts.

2. Pull the entire system from the top of the engine.

3. Turn the system over and place it on a soft, non ‐ abrasive surface.

4. Remove the screws that hold the housing and cover together and lift off the housing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the system. Be sure to reinstall the housing tightly.

{ WARNING:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when working on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

Automatic Transmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.

A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to a dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the

Maintenance Schedule. See

Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3 . Be sure to use the transmission fluid

listed in

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 8

.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 8 .

Manual Transmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check the manual transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to a dealer for service. Have it repaired as soon as possible.

You may also have the fluid level checked by your dealer when the oil is changed. See

Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 8

for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic Clutch

The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self-adjusting. This system does not have its own reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir.

See

Brakes on page 6 ‑ 32

for more information.

6-23

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Cooling System

The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.

2.4 L L4 Engine Shown, 2.2 L L4 Engine Similar

A. Pressure Cap

B. Coolant Recovery Tank

C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)

Black plate (24,1)

{ WARNING:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.

Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

6-24

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (25,1)

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL

® can cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with

DEX-COOL ® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km

(150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.

The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see

Engine

Overheating on page 6 ‑ 29 .

What to Use

{ WARNING:

Adding only plain water or some other liquid to the cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water and other liquids, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. The coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and

DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture:

.

Gives freezing protection down to − 34°F ( − 37°C), outside temperature.

.

.

Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C), engine temperature.

Protects against rust and corrosion.

6-25

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (26,1)

.

.

Will not damage aluminum parts.

Helps keep the proper engine temperature.

Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.

See

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 8

for more information.

Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level.

The coolant recovery tank cap has this symbol on it. The tank is located in the engine compartment toward the front of the engine on the passenger's side of the vehicle.

See

Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14

for more information on location.

Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.

If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.

6-26

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (27,1)

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD FILL (A) line or a little higher. The COLD

FILL line is near the bottom of the tank and sticks out from the rear of the tank.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at or above the COLD FILL line. If it is not, you may have a leak in the cooling system.

How to Add Coolant to the Cooling

System

{ WARNING:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.

Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged.

{ WARNING:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

6-27

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (28,1)

{ WARNING:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

If no coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank, add coolant at the pressure cap as follows:

1. Remove the pressure cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left to be vented.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.

3. Add the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture to the coolant fill port, up to the base of the port. See

Engine Coolant on page 6 ‑ 25

Engine Coolant for more information about the proper coolant mixture.

4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine and the compartment.

6-28

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (29,1)

5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD

FILL (A) line.

6. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the pressure cap off.

7. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

8. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler port may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture through the fill port until the level reaches the base of the fill port.

9. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure, if coolant begins to flow out of the fill port, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

10. When the engine has cooled, check the coolant in the coolant recovery tank. The level in the coolant recovery tank should be at the COLD FILL line when the engine is cold.

Engine Overheating

The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating.

You will find a coolant temperature warning light and a coolant temperature gauge on your vehicle's instrument panel. See

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 32

and

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 4 ‑ 33

for more information.

You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears, but instead get service help right away. See

Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 .

6-29

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (30,1)

If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage from running the engine without coolant is not covered by the warranty.

Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being driven with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

If Steam Is Coming from the Engine

Compartment

{ WARNING:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

6-30

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (31,1)

If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine

Compartment

If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle:

.

.

Climbs a long hill on a hot day

Stops after high-speed driving

.

.

Idles for long periods in traffic

Tows a trailer

If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.

6-31

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (32,1)

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to Use

When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washer symbol on it.

Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See

Engine

Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14

for reservoir location.

Notice:

.

When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer's instructions for adding water.

.

Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as well as washer fluid.

6-32

.

.

Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.

Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder and, on manual transmission vehicles, the clutch hydraulic system use the same reservoir. See

Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14

for the location of the reservoir. The reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down:

.

.

The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up.

A fluid leak in the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes and/or clutch will not work well.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (33,1)

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the brake linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic system.

{ WARNING:

If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See

Brake System Warning

Light on page 4 ‑ 29

.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container. See

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 8

.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{ WARNING:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or clutch hydraulic system, the brakes or clutch might not work well. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:

.

Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake or clutch hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in the brake or clutch hydraulic system can damage brake or clutch hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

.

If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See

Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 ‑ 97

.

6-33

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (34,1)

Brake Wear

This vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear drum brakes or rear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING:

The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in

Capacities and Specifications on page 6 ‑ 108 .

If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have wear indicators, but if a rear brake rubbing noise is heard, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately. Rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When the front brake pads are replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be required.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

6-34

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (35,1)

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.

When parts of the braking system are replaced — for example, when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed — be sure to get new approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance between the front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed.

Battery

Refer to the replacement number on the original battery label when a new battery is needed.

The battery is located in the cargo area. Access to the battery is not necessary to jump start the vehicle. See

Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 36 .

{ DANGER:

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See

Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 36

for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative ( − ) cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down.

Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative ( − ) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.

6-35

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (36,1)

Jump Starting

For more information about the vehicle battery, see

Battery on page 6 ‑ 35

.

If the vehicle's battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start the vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING:

.

.

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:

They contain acid that can burn you.

They contain gas that can explode or ignite.

.

They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting. If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You would not be able to start the vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.

6-36

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Notice: If the radio or other accessories are left on during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.

Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive (+) and negative ( − ) terminal locations on that vehicle.

You will not see the battery of your vehicle under the hood. It is located in the rear cargo area. You will not need to access your battery for jump starting. The vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a remote negative ( − ) jump starting terminal.

Black plate (37,1)

Locate the remote positive terminal which is located under a red tethered cap on the engine compartment fuse block. Remove the cap to access the terminal.

Do not remove fuse block cover to jump start the vehicle.

6-37

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (38,1)

Locate the remote negative ( − ) ground terminal, marked GND ( − ), which is located at the front of the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle.

See

Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14

for more information on the location of the positive (+) and negative ( − ) terminals on the vehicle.

{ WARNING:

An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don't, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.

6-38

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (39,1)

{ WARNING:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative ( − ) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative ( − ) terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) to negative ( − ) or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative ( − ) cable to the negative ( − ) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative ( − ) cable to the negative ( − ) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative ( − ) terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative ( − ) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative ( − ) terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative ( − ) cable to the negative ( − ) terminal location on the vehicle with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative ( − ) ground terminal marked GND ( − ).

6-39

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.

If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal.

Black plate (40,1)

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote

Negative ( − ) Terminal (GND)

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote

Negative ( − ) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles:

1. Disconnect the black negative ( − ) cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative ( − ) cable from the vehicle with the good battery.

6-40

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (41,1)

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its original position.

Headlamp Aiming

The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system. The aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your dealer for service if the headlamps need to be re-aimed.

It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as described.

The vehicle should:

.

Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall.

.

.

.

Have all four tires on a level surface which is level all the way to the wall.

Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface.

Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.

.

.

.

.

Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being performed.

Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.

Have all tires properly inflated.

Have the spare tire is in its original location in the vehicle.

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle's low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.

6-41

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See

Hood Release on page 6 ‑ 12

for more information.

Black plate (42,1)

2. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low ‐ beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot on the low ‐ beam headlamp. Record the distance.

4. At the wall measure from the ground upward (A) to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in

Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up which may cause damage to the headlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being adjusted. Do not place directly on the headlamp. This allows only the beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface.

6-42

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (43,1)

Driver Side Shown

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.

The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm hex socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam.

The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp.

6-43

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Bulb Replacement

For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see

Replacement Bulbs on page 6 ‑ 48

.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.

Black plate (44,1)

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps

A. Headlamp

B. Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

To replace the headlamp, turn signal, or parking lamp bulb:

1. Turn the wheel to access the wheel well.

6-44

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

2. Remove the fasteners located on the wheel liner.

To access the headlamp and the turn signal/ parking lamp bulbs.

Black plate (45,1)

3. Reach in behind the wheel well liner and locate the bulb to be changed.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it straight out of the lamp assembly.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.

6. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket until it clicks.

7. Push the bulb socket straight into the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise to lock it into place.

8. Reinstall the wheel well liner using fasteners.

6-45

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

(CHMSL)

To replace the center high-mounted stoplamp bulb:

1. Open the liftgate. See

Liftgate on page 3 ‑ 12 .

Black plate (46,1)

2. Remove the center trim located near the top of the liftgate.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it straight out of the lamps assembly.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.

5. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket until it clicks.

6. Push the bulb socket straight into the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise to lock it into place.

7. Reinstall the center trim.

6-46

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps

Black plate (47,1)

A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp

B. Back-up Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See

Liftgate on page 3 ‑ 12 .

2. Remove the cover in the rear cargo area of the vehicle to access the bulbs.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it straight out of the lamp assembly.

4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

5. Install a new bulb. When installing the bulb socket into the assembly, line up the tabs with the slots in the bulb assembly.

6-47

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (48,1)

6. Push the bulb socket straight into the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise to lock it into place.

7. Reinstall the cover.

License Plate Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license plate lamps to the fascia.

4. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket and turn it clockwise to lock it into place.

5. Push and turn the license plate back through the fascia opening.

6. Reinstall the two screws holding the license plate lamps to the fascia.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp

Back-up Lamp and CHMSL

Front Turn Signal and Parking

Lamp (Amber)

Front Turn Signal and Parking

Lamp (Clear)

Headlamp High/Low-Beam

License Plate Lamp

Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal

Bulb Number

921LL

5702KA

3157K

H13

168LL

3057KX

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward through the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

6-48

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (49,1)

Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking. See

Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3

for more information on wiper blade inspection.

Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For the proper type and length, see

Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 ‑ 10 . Here's how to remove the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.

3. Install the new wiper blade on the wiper arm and press down on the clip to snap it into place.

Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement

1. Remove the protective cap from the wiper arm.

If the protective cap is not removed before lifting the wiper arm, the wiper arm could be damaged.

2. Pull the wiper arm away from the backglass and into the service position.

3. Rotate the wiper blade, and pull down on it to remove it from the wiper arm.

4. Install the new wiper blade, then set the wiper arm back into its original position and replace the protective cap.

2. While holding the wiper arm, lift the clip up from the blade connecting point, and pull the blade assembly down toward the windshield to remove it from the wiper arm.

6-49

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Tires

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your vehicle

Warranty booklet for details. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING:

.

.

.

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.

Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. You could have a blowout and a serious accident. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23 .

Under inflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold.

(Continued)

6-50

Black plate (50,1)

WARNING: (Continued)

.

.

.

.

.

Over inflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact — such as when you hit a pothole.

Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If your tread is badly worn, replace them.

Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc.

Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash.

Only your dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires.

Do not spin the tires in excess of 55 km/h

(35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (51,1)

Tire Sidewall Labeling

Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

construction type, and service description. See the “ Tire Size ” illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria

Specification)

: Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a

TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.

GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation)

:

The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the

U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN)

: The letters and numbers following DOT (Department of

Transportation) code is the Tire Identification

Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.

Passenger (P ‐ Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size

: The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio,

6-51

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

(E) Tire Ply Material

: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)

:

Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information see

Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6

68

.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit

:

Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.

Black plate (52,1)

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Temporary Use Only

: The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).

The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see

Compact Spare Tire on page 6

93

and

If a Tire

Goes Flat on page 6

71

.

6-52

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (53,1)

(B) Tire Ply Material

: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN)

: The letters and numbers following the DOT (Department of

Transportation) code is the Tire Identification

Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit

:

Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation

: The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi

(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure and inflation see

Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6

57

.

(F) Tire Size

: A combination of letters and numbers define a tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria

Specification)

: Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a

TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.

GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.

Tire Size

The following illustration shows an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P

Metric) Tire

: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width

: The three ‐ digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

6-53

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (54,1)

(C) Aspect Ratio

: A two ‐ digit number that indicates the tire height ‐ to ‐ width measurements.

For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code

: A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.

The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted ‐ bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter

: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description

: These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carrying capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure

: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.

Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

6-54

Accessory Weight

: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio

: The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

Belt

: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead

: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire

: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure

: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See

Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6

57

.

Curb Weight

: The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (55,1)

DOT Markings

: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production.

GVWR

: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5

23

.

GAWR FRT

: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5

23

.

GAWR RR

: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5

23

.

Intended Outboard Sidewall

: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa)

: The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT

Metric) Tire

: A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load Index

: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure

: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.

The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating

: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight

: The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight

: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg). See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5

23

.

Occupant Distribution

: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall

: The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire.

6-55

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (56,1)

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure

: Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See

Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6

57

and

Loading the Vehicle on page 5

23

.

Radial Ply Tire

: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at

90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim

: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall

: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating

: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction

: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread

: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators

: Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See

When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6

65

.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards)

: A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See

Uniform

Tire Quality Grading on page 6

68

.

Vehicle Capacity Weight

: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs

(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See

Loading the

Vehicle on page 5

23

.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire

: Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard

: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See “ Tire and

Loading Information Label ” under

Loading the

Vehicle on page 5

23

.

6-56

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (57,1)

Inflation - Tire Pressure

Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively.

Notice:

Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in:

.

Tire overloading and over-heating which could lead to a blowout.

.

.

Premature or irregular wear.

Poor handling.

.

Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in:

.

.

.

.

Unusual wear.

Poor handling.

Rough ride.

Needless damage from road hazards.

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows your vehicle's original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see

Loading the Vehicle on page 5

23

. How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding the compact spare tire, see

Compact

Spare Tire on page 6

93

.

6-57

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (58,1)

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under ‐ inflated. Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.

Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.

Re ‐ check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.

The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under ‐ inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under ‐ inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under ‐ inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

6-58

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (59,1)

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under ‐ inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ‐ ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

See

Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 ‑ 59

for additional information.

Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) and Industry Canada

See

Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 18

for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry

Canada Standards RSS-210/220/310.

Tire Pressure Monitor Operation

This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System

(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. If the vehicle has this feature, TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the

TPMS turns on the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument cluster.

6-59

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (60,1)

If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the tire loading information label. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23 .

A message to check the pressure in a specific tire displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. Using the

DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed. For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see

DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 ‑ 39

and

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 41 .

The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure is getting low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when they are cold. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23 , for an example of the Tire

and Loading Information label and its location. Also see

Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 57 .

The TPMS system can warn about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See

Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 ‑ 63

and

Tires on page 6 ‑ 50

.

Notice: Tire sealant materials are not all the same.

A non-approved tire sealant could damage the

TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use only the GM-approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants could damage the TPMS sensors. See

Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit on page 6 ‑ 73

for information regarding the inflator kit materials and instructions.

6-60

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (61,1)

TPMS Malfunction Light and Message

The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message also displays. The malfunction light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are:

.

One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a

TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go after the road tire is replaced and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See "TPMS Sensor Matching

Process" later in this section.

.

The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching process. See

"TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.

.

.

One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer for service.

Replacement tires or wheels do not match the original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

See

Buying New Tires on page 6 ‑ 65 .

.

Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition. See your dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on.

6-61

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (62,1)

TPMS Sensor Matching Process

Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.

The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire/wheel position after rotating the tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor matching process should also be performed after replacing a spare tire with a road tire containing the

TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off at the next ignition cycle. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a

TPMS relearn tool, in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear. See your dealer for service or to purchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/ wheel positions. If it takes longer, the matching process stops and must be restarted.

The TPMS matching process is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter's LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the same time, for about five seconds to start the

TPMS learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.

6-62

4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side front turn signal also comes on to indicate that corner's sensor is ready to be learned.

5. Place the relearn tool against the tire sidewall, near the valve stem. Then press the button to activate the TPMS sensor. A horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position.

6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.

Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.

Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.

Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to indicate the tire learning process is done. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (63,1)

If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn mode, or if communication with the receiver stops, or if the time limit has expired, turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start over beginning with Step 2.

10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

Tire Inspection and Rotation

We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, for signs of wear or damage. See

When It Is Time for New

Tires on page 6

65

for more information.

Always remove the tires if any of the following statements are true:

.

You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.

.

You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber.

.

.

The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

.

The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

Tires should be rotated every 12 000 km

(7,500 miles). See

Scheduled Maintenance on page 7

3

.

The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.

This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See

When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6

65

and

Wheel Replacement on page 6

70

.

6-63

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (64,1)

When rotating the vehicle's tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See

Inflation - Tire

Pressure on page 6

57

and

Loading the Vehicle on page 5

23

.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See

Tire

Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6

59

.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “ Wheel Nut Torque ” under

Capacities and Specifications on page 6

108

.

{ WARNING:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See

Changing a Flat Tire on page 6

80

.

Lightly coat the center of the wheel hub with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust build-up. Do not get grease on the flat wheel mounting surface or on the wheel nuts or bolts.

6-64

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (65,1)

When It Is Time for New Tires

Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions influence when you need new tires.

One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch

(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. See

Tire

Inspection and Rotation on page 6 ‑ 63

for additional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time, even if they are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. Tires will typically need to be replaced due to wear before they may need to be replaced due to age. Consult the tire manufacturer for more information on when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to slow aging. This area should be free of grease, gasoline or other substances that can deteriorate rubber.

Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving.

When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires.

Buying New Tires

GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria

Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating.

This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires.

6-65

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all ‐ season tread design, the TPC

Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See

Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6

51

for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.

This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle. See

Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6

63

for information on proper tire rotation.

Black plate (66,1)

{ WARNING:

Tires could explode during improper service.

Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death. Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes, brands, or types may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels. It is all right to drive with your compact spare temporarily, as it was developed for use on your vehicle. See

Compact Spare Tire on page 6

93

.

6-66

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (67,1)

{ WARNING:

Using bias-ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction type (radial and bias ‐ belted tires) as your vehicle's original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low ‐ pressure warning if non ‐ TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non ‐ TPC Spec rated tires may give a low ‐ pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with

TPC Spec rated tires. See

Tire Pressure Monitor

System on page 6

58

.

Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label.

See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5

23

, for

more information about the Tire and Loading

Information Label and its location on your vehicle.

6-67

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (68,1)

Different Size Tires and Wheels

If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires, this could affect the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti ‐ lock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control, the performance of these systems can be affected.

{ WARNING:

If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician.

See

Buying New Tires on page 6 ‑ 65

and

Accessories and Modifications on page 6 ‑ 3

for additional information.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A

The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional

General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

6-68

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (69,1)

All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal

Safety Requirements In Addition To These

Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard

No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

6-69

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (70,1)

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).

See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for your vehicle.

{ WARNING:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air, and cause loss of control, causing a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.

See

Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 ‑ 80

for more information.

6-70

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (71,1)

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING:

Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous.

How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new

GM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING: (Continued)

Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle's wheels. If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes Flat

It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly.

If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.

Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.

6-71

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (72,1)

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.

{ WARNING:

Driving on a flat tire will cause permanent damage to the tire. Re-inflating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a serious crash. Never attempt to re-inflate a tire that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat. Have your dealer or an authorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible.

{ WARNING:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.

If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.

This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and spare tire, see

Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 ‑ 80

.

To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see

Tire

Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6 ‑ 73 .

6-72

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (73,1)

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit

{ WARNING:

Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains

Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see

Engine Exhaust on page 3 ‑ 37 .

{ WARNING:

Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured.

Be sure to read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure. Do not exceed the recommended pressure.

{ WARNING:

Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone.

Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit, there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment, and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily seal punctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in the tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate an under inflated tire.

If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. See

Roadside

Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 .

6-73

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (74,1)

Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions.

The kit includes:

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the label adhered to the compressor.

Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer. See

“ Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister ” following.

There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose assembly must be replaced. See “ Removal and

Installation of the Sealant Canister ” following.

A. On/Off Button

B. Selector Switch

(Sealant/Air or Air Only)

C. Pressure Relief Button

D. Pressure Gauge

E. Air Only Hose

(Black)

F. Sealant/Air Hose

(Clear)

G. Power Plug

6-74

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (75,1)

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor

Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a

Punctured Tire

Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment for five minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See

Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 .

See

If a Tire Goes Flat on page 6 ‑ 71

for other important safety warnings.

Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire.

Always do a safety check first. See

If a Tire Goes Flat on page 6 ‑ 71

. Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location. See

Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit Storage on page 6 ‑ 80 .

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power plug (G).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.

6-75

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (76,1)

6. Plug the power plug (G) into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets. See

Accessory Power

Outlet(s) on page 4 ‑ 16 .

If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (B) clockwise to the

Sealant + Air position.

9. Press the on/off (A) button to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on.

The compressor will inject sealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (D) will initially show a high pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant into the tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gauge (D). The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. See

Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 57 .

The pressure gauge (D) may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve. See

Roadside

Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 .

11. Press the on/off button (A) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in the tire, therefore,

Steps 12 through 18 must be done immediately after Step 11.

Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.

6-76

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (77,1)

12. Unplug the power plug (G) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to remove it from the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power plug (G) back in their original location.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflate to the recommended inflation pressure, remove the maximum speed label from the sealant canister and place it in a highly visible location. Do not exceed the speed on this label until the damaged tire is repaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to its original storage location in the vehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle 8 km (5 miles) to distribute the sealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.

Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “ Using the Tire

Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to

Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).

If the tire pressure has fallen more than 68 kPa

(10 psi) below the recommended inflation pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire. See

Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 .

If the tire pressure has not dropped more than

68 kPa (10 psi) from the recommended inflation pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealant canister and sealant/ air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer or in accordance with local state codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer within a 161 km (100 miles) of driving to have the tire repaired or replaced.

6-77

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (78,1)

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor

Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not

Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See

Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 .

See

If a Tire Goes Flat on page 6 ‑ 71

for other important safety warnings.

6-78

Always do a safety check first. See

If a Tire Goes Flat on page 6 ‑ 71

. Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location. See

Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit Storage on page 6 ‑ 80 .

2. Unwrap the air only hose (E) and the power plug (G).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (E) onto the tire valve stem by turning it clockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (G) into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets. See

Accessory Power

Outlet(s) on page 4 ‑ 16 .

If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (79,1)

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (B) counterclockwise to the Air Only position.

9. Press the on/off (A) button to turn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gauge (D). The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. See

Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 57 .

The pressure gauge (D) may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.

Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure is reached.

11. Press the on/off button (A) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off.

Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.

12. Unplug the power plug (G) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air only hose (E) from the tire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (E) and the power plug

(G) and cord back in its original location.

15. Place the equipment in the original storage location in the vehicle.

Removal and Installation of the Sealant

Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Remove the plastic cover.

2. Unscrew the connector (B) from the canister (A).

3. Pull up on the canister (A) to remove it.

6-79

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

4. Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer.

5. Push the new canister into place.

6. Screw the connector (B) to the canister (A).

7. Slide the plastic cover back on.

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit

Storage

The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the rear compartment storage area.

1. Open the liftgate. See

Liftgate on page 3 ‑ 12 .

2. Lift the storage cover.

Black plate (80,1)

3. Turn the retainer clockwise and remove the tire sealant and compressor kit.

To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse the steps.

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See

Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3

.

6-80

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (81,1)

{ WARNING:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people. You and they could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in

P (Park), or shift a manual transmission to

1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle will not move, you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed.

That would be the tire on the other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire.

6-81

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The jack, wheel wrench, and spare tire are stowed in the rear of the vehicle, underneath the floor of the cargo area. To remove the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the liftgate. See

Liftgate on page 3 ‑ 12

for more information.

Black plate (82,1)

2. Remove the cargo cover.

6-82

3. Turn the retainer counterclockwise to remove the tire cover.

4. Remove the tire cover.

5. Remove the spare tire by placing your hands at the four and eight o'clock positions. Gently pull it up and out of the trunk. See

Compact Spare Tire on page 6 ‑ 93

.

6. Remove the wing nut that holds the jack. Then remove the jack, wheel wrench, and flat tire strap.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (83,1)

The tools needed are the jack (A) and wheel wrench (B).

Turn the plastic wheel nut counterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrench from the jack.

6-83

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (84,1)

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See

Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 ‑ 80

for more information.

Press the button and then pull on the end of the wheel wrench to extend the handle.

2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.

Do not remove them yet.

6-84

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

3. Position the jack and raise the jack lift head to fit over the car flange under the down arrow markings on the rocker panel.

Black plate (85,1)

{ WARNING:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

6-85

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

{ WARNING:

Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.

Black plate (86,1)

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the compact spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.

6-86

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

Black plate (87,1)

6. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.

{ WARNING:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See

Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 ‑ 80

.

7. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING:

Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a crash.

8. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

6-87

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (88,1)

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

{ WARNING:

Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the

(Continued)

6-88

WARNING: (Continued) torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See

Capacities and Specifications on page 6 ‑ 108

for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See

Capacities and

Specifications on page 6 ‑ 108

for the wheel nut torque specification.

10. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and

Tools

{ WARNING:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

Black plate (89,1)

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

To store the flat tire:

1. Open the liftgate. See

Liftgate on page 3 ‑ 12

for more information.

2. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. For more information, see “ Storing the Compact Spare Tire and Tools ” next in this section.

3. Install the cargo cover. For more information, see

Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover on page 3 ‑ 48

.

4. Place the tire, lying flat, in the rear storage compartment.

If there is a loop on the end of the strap used to secure the flat tire, go to Step 5. If there is not a loop, go to Step 8.

6-89

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

5. Route the loop end of the strap (C) through one of the cargo tie-downs (A) located in the rear of the vehicle.

6. Route the hook (B) through the loop (C).

7. Pull the strap to tighten it around the cargo tie-down (A).

Black plate (90,1)

Aluminum Wheel

6-90

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (91,1)

9. Attach the strap to the cargo tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.

Steel Wheel

8. Route the hook end of the strap through the wheel.

10. Slide the buckle to tighten the tie-down strap.

6-91

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Storing the Compact Spare Tire and

Tools

Use the diagram as a guide for storing the compact spare tire once you are done using it.

Black plate (92,1)

2. Install the strap (F) on the floor of the spare tire compartment.

3. Place the jack and wheel wrench (E) over the bolt (G), making sure the strap is securely stored, under the jack and wheel wrench.

4. Secure the jack and wheel wrench (E) with the wing nut (D).

5. With the valve stem up, place the spare tire (C) on the compartment floor.

6. Make sure the bolt (G) passes through the wheel center.

7. Install the spare tire cover (B).

8. Secure the spare tire and tools with the retainer (A).

The compact spare tire storage area is designed only for the compact spare tire, the standard tire cannot be stored there.

A. Retainer

B. Cover

C. Spare Tire

D. Wing Nut

E. Jack and Wheel Wrench

F. Strap

G. Bolt

1. Open the liftgate. See

Liftgate on page 3 ‑ 12

for more information.

6-92

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (93,1)

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING:

Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a time could result in loss of braking and handling.

This could lead to a crash and you or others could be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact spare tire it was fully inflated when the vehicle was new, however, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.

It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.

Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the compact spare.

Appearance Care

Interior Cleaning

The interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. The interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

6-93

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (94,1)

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the interior.

When cleaning the interior, only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.

Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in the breathing space. Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors from the upholstery and clean the glass can be obtained from your dealer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:

.

.

A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface.

A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the interior surfaces.

.

.

.

.

Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal.

Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.

Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.

Cleaners that contain solvents can damage the interior.

6-94

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (95,1)

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques:

.

For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed.

.

For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and then vacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet.

Leather

Leather, and lighter colored leather in particular, will need more frequent cleaning to prevent the buildup of dust, dirt, and colors transferred from other items so that these do not become permanent stains.

To remove dust, a soft cloth dampened with water can be used. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used. Your dealer has a GM approved leather cleaner available that provides superior cleaning performance when used regularly on finished automotive leathers. Allow the leather to dry naturally.

6-95

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (96,1)

Do not use heat, steam, spot lifters or spot removers, or shoe polish on leather. Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces

A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.

Notice: Air fresheners contain solvents that may cause damage to plastics and painted surfaces.

Follow the manufacturer ’ s instructions when using air fresheners in the vehicle. If air freshener comes in contact with paint or a plastic surface, blot immediately with a soft cloth. Damage caused by using air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

6-96

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (97,1)

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather frequent application may be required.

See

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 8

.

Washing Your Vehicle

The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep it clean by washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.

Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. Follow all manufacturers' directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than

12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.

Follow instructions under

Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 ‑ 97

.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.

6-97

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (98,1)

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.

If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts

Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually needed. However, chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.

A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

.

.

Extreme dusty conditions

Sand and salt

.

.

Heat and sun

Snow and ice, without proper removal

6-98

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (99,1)

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim

The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle's chrome with soap and water after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because they could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application.

Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes, could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.

6-99

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (100,1)

Tires

To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.

Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this.

6-100

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (101,1)

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within

12 months or 20 000 km (12,000 mi) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “ Engine Specifications ” under

Capacities and Specifications on page 6 ‑ 108

for the vehicle's engine code.

6-101

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (102,1)

Service Parts Identification Label

This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the following information:

.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

.

.

Model designation.

Paint information.

.

Production options and special equipment.

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see

Servicing

Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2 ‑ 74

and

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2 ‑ 74 .

Headlamp Wiring

The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper Fuses

The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.

If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power

Options

Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.

When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

6-102

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (103,1)

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have a spare fuse, you can “ borrow ” one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle that you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

There are two fuse blocks in the vehicle: the floor console fuse block and the engine compartment fuse block.

There are also one or two fuses located at the back of the vehicle near the battery.

Floor Console Fuse Block

The floor console fuse block is located on the passenger side of the floor console behind the forward panel. The panel has four clips, one in each corner. Pull the panel to disconnect the four clips, and access the fuses. Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.

6-103

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (104,1)

10

11

12

13

14

15

Fuses

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

6

7

16

17

18

19

Usage

Fuse Puller

Empty

Empty

Empty

Empty

Amplifier

Cluster

Ignition Switch, PASS-Key

®

III+

Stoplamp

Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning,

PASS-Key ® III+

Empty

Empty

Airbag

Empty

Windshield Wiper

Climate Control System, Ignition, Rear

View Camera

Power Windows

Empty

Electric Power Steering, Steering

Wheel Control

6-104

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (105,1)

25

26

27

28

29

Fuses

20

21

22

23

24

Usage

Sunroof

Empty

Empty

Audio System

XM Radio ™ , OnStar ™

Engine Control Module, Transmission

Control Module

Door Locks

Interior Lights

Steering Wheel Control Illumination

Empty

Relays

30

31

32

Usage

Climate Control System

Empty

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The underhood fuse block is located on the driver side of the engine compartment. Lift the cover to access the fuse/relay block.

Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.

The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.

Fuses

1

2

3

4

5

Electric Power Steering

Rear Defogger

Empty

Body Control Module 3

Starting System

Usage

6-105

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

6-106

20

21

22

23

25

11

12

13

Fuses

6

7

8

9

10

31

32

33

36

37

27

29

30

Usage

Body Control Module 2

Rear Power Plug (Panel Van Only)

Empty

Air Conditioning Clutch Diode

Liftgate, Sunroof

Empty

Rear Power Outlet (Panel Van Only)

Fuel Pump

Rear Wiper

Mirror

Air Conditioning

Heated Seats (Option)

Fuse Puller

Empty

Cigarette Lighter

Power Outlet

Daytime Running Lamps

Empty

Emissions

Power Windows

Power Seat (Option)

Black plate (106,1)

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

45

46

47

49

53

Fuses

40

41

42

43

44

Usage

Cooling Fan

Engine Control Module

Empty

Engine Control Module, Transmission

Antilock Brake System (Option)

Injectors, Ignition Module

Backup Lamps

Heated Seat

Windshield Washer Pump

Fog Lamps (Option)

Sensing and Diagnostic

Module (SDM)

Antilock Brake System (Option)

Windshield Wiper Diode

Windshield Wiper

Horn

Antilock Brake System (Option)

Instrument Panel, Ignition

Driver Side High-Beam

Canister Vent

Driver Side Low-Beam

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Fuses

66

67

69

34

35

38

39

48

24

26

28

Relays

14

15

16

17

18

19

Usage

Passenger Side Low-Beam

Passenger Side High-Beam

Parking Lamps

Usage

Rear Defogger Relay

Air Conditioning Clutch

Empty

Rear Wiper

Liftgate Release

Fuel Pump

Empty

Powertrain

Daytime Running Lamps

Starting System

Empty

Empty

Windshield Washer Pump

Rear Windshield Washer

Black plate (107,1)

Relays

50

51

52

54

55

68

70

71

72

Usage

Cooling Fan

Run, Crank

Windshield Wiper

Fog Lamps (Option)

Horn

Parking Lamps

Windshield Wipers

Headlamp Low-Beam

Headlamp High-Beam

A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Relay, and a Rear

Access Panel Door Interlock Relay (Panel Van only), are located underhood in front of the left shock tower.

The Left Rear Access Panel Door Relay (Panel Van

Only), and the Right Rear Access Panel Door Relay

(Panel Van Only) are located in the rear of the vehicle behind the right rear quarter trim panel.

A Rear Power Plug mini fuse (Panel Van Only) is located near the battery in the rear of the vehicle.

6-107

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (108,1)

Capacities and Specifications

The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to

Maintenance

Replacement Parts on page 7 ‑ 10

for more information.

Application

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

Capacities

English Metric

For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant label located under the hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

2.2L Engine

2.4L Engine with Automatic Transmission

2.4L Engine with Manual Transmission

Engine Oil with Filter

Fuel Tank

Transmission Fluid

Automatic (Bottom Pan Removal)

7.4 qt

8.5 qt

8.7 qt

5.0 qt

16.2 gal

7.0 L

8.0 L

8.2 L

4.7 L

61.3 L

7.0 qt 6.6 L

Manual — 2.2L L4 or 2.4L L4 Engine (Drain and Refill)

Wheel Nut Torque

1.7 qt

100 lb ft

1.6 L

140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.

6-108

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Engine

2.2L L4 Engine

2.4L L4 Engine

W

Engine Specifications

VIN Code Transmission

Automatic

Manual

U

Automatic

Manual

Black plate (109,1)

Spark Plug Gap

0.040 in (1.01 mm)

0.040 in (1.01 mm)

6-109

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

2 NOTES

Black plate (110,1)

6-110

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Section 7 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

7-1

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

Maintenance Schedule

Introduction

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition.

Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you are responsible for the scheduled maintenance in this section. We recommend having your dealer perform these services. Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.

Because of all the different ways people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services. Please read the information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.

The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:

.

carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.

See

Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 23

.

.

.

are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.

use the recommended fuel. See

Gasoline Octane on page 6 ‑ 6 .

{ WARNING:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, see your dealer to have a qualified technician do the work. See

Doing Your

Own Service Work on page 6 ‑ 4 .

At your dealer, you can be certain that you will receive the highest level of service available. Your dealer has specially trained service technicians, uses genuine replacement parts, as well as, up ‐ to ‐ date tools and equipment to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.

7-2

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 8

and

Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 ‑ 10 . We recommend the use of genuine parts

from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for new tires be performed. Tires should be rotated every

12 000 km/7,500 miles. See

Tire Inspection and

Rotation on page 6 ‑ 63 .

Scheduled Maintenance

When the Change Oil Soon Message

Displays

Change engine oil and filter. See

Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16 .

An Emission Control Service.

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message displays, service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service technicians who will perform this work and reset the system. If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within

5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service. Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See

Engine

Oil Life System on page 6 ‑ 20 .

When the Change Oil Soon message displays, certain services, checks, and inspections are required.

Every Engine Oil Change

.

.

.

.

.

Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.

See

Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16

and

Engine Oil Life

System on page 6 ‑ 20 .

An Emission Control

Service.

Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 6 ‑ 25 .

Engine cooling system inspection. Visual inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and replacement, if needed.

Windshield washer fluid level check. See

Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 ‑ 32 .

Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear, cracking, or contamination and windshield and wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated. See

Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6 ‑ 98 .

Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement.

See

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 6 ‑ 49

.

7-3

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Tire inflation pressures check. See

Inflation - Tire

Pressure on page 6 ‑ 57

.

Tire wear inspection. See

Tire Inspection and

Rotation on page 6 ‑ 63 .

Rotate tires if necessary. See

Tire Inspection and

Rotation on page 6 ‑ 63 .

Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must be repaired and the fluid level checked.

Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See

Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter on page 6 ‑ 21

.

Brake system inspection (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

Steering and suspension inspection. Visual inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear.

Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders, and rear compartment hinges lubrication. See

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 8

. More frequent lubrication may be required when the vehicle is exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

Restraint system component check. See

Checking the Restraint Systems on page 2 ‑ 76

.

.

.

Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.

Exhaust system and nearby heat shields inspection for loose or damaged components.

Additional Required Services

Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles

.

Rotate tires. Tires should be rotated every

12 000 km/7,500 miles. See

Tire Inspection and

Rotation on page 6 ‑ 63

.

At Each Fuel Stop

.

.

.

Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16

.

Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 6 ‑ 25

.

Windshield washer fluid level check. See

Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 ‑ 32

.

Once a Month

.

.

.

Tire inflation pressures check. See

Inflation - Tire

Pressure on page 6 ‑ 57 .

Tire wear inspection. See

Tire Inspection and

Rotation on page 6 ‑ 63

.

Sunroof track and seal inspection, if equipped. See

Sunroof on page 3 ‑ 52 .

7-4

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Once a Year

.

Starter switch check. See

Owner Checks and

Services on page 7 ‑ 6

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Automatic transmission shiftlock control function check. See

Owner Checks and Services on page 7 ‑ 6

.

Ignition transmission lock check. See

Owner

Checks and Services on page 7 ‑ 6 .

Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism check. See

Owner Checks and

Services on page 7 ‑ 6

.

Throttle system inspection for interference, binding or for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

Underbody flushing service.

Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass Support Gas Strut

Service: Visually inspect gas strut, if equipped, for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage. Check the hold open ability of the gas strut. Contact your dealer if service is required.

First Engine Oil Change After Every

40 000 km/25,000 Miles

.

Passenger compartment air filter replacement

(or every 24 months, whichever occurs first).

More frequent replacement may be needed if you drive in areas with heavy traffic, areas with poor air quality, or areas with high dust levels.

Replacement may also be needed if you notice reduced air flow, windows fogging up, or odors.

Your dealer can help you determine when it is the right time to replace the filter.

First Engine Oil Change After Every

80 000 km/50,000 Miles

.

.

Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See

Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6 ‑ 21

.

Automatic transmission fluid change (severe service only) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for taxi, police, or delivery service. See

Automatic

Transmission Fluid on page 6 ‑ 23 .

7-5

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

.

Evaporative control system inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook ‐ up, routing, and condition. Check that the purge valve, if the vehicle has one, works properly. Replace as needed.

An Emission Control Service. The U.S.

Environmental Protection Agency or the California

Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle's useful life.

We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.

First Engine Oil Change After Every

160 000 km/100,000 Miles

.

Spark plug replacement and spark plug wires inspection.

An Emission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change After Every

240 000 km/150,000 Miles

.

.

Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill (or every five years, whichever occurs first). See

Engine Coolant on page 6 ‑ 25

.

An Emission

Control Service.

Engine drive belts inspection for fraying, excessive cracks, or obvious damage (or every 10 years, whichever occurs first). Replace, if needed.

7-6

Owner Checks and Services

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See

Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 33

.

Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway, and try to start the engine. The starter should work only when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the starter works when the clutch pedal is not pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock

Control Function Check

{ WARNING:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See

Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 33

.

Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of

P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock Check

While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.

.

For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever is in P (Park). The ignition key should come out only in LOCK/OFF.

.

For manual transmission vehicles, the ignition key should come out only in LOCK/OFF.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.

It should only lock when turned to the right.

Contact your dealer if service is required.

7-7

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

Parking Brake and Automatic

Transmission P (Park) Mechanism

Check

{ WARNING:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.

.

To check the parking brake's holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in

N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

.

To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:

With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.

Contact your dealer if service is required.

7-8

Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage

Engine Oil

Engine Cooling

System

Hydraulic Brake

System

Hydraulic Clutch

System

Fluid/Lubricant

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification.

Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See

Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16

.

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL

Coolant. See

Engine Coolant on page 6 ‑ 25

.

DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid

(GM Part No. 88863461, in

Canada 88863462).

DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid

(GM Part No. 88863461, in

Canada 88863462).

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Usage

Windshield

Washer

Parking Brake

Cable Guides

Manual

Transmission

Automatic

Transmission

Key Lock

Cylinders

Manual

Transmission

Shift Linkage

Fluid/Lubricant

Optikleen ® Washer Solvent.

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.

12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of

NLGI #2, Category LB or GC ‐ LB.

DEXRON

®

-VI Automatic

Transmission Fluid.

DEXRON ® -VI Automatic Transmission

Fluid.

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube

(GM Part No. 12346241, in

Canada 10953474).

Chassis Lubricant

(GM Part No. 12377985, in

Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,

Category LB or GC-LB.

Usage

Chassis

Lubrication

Fluid/Lubricant

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.

12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of

NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood Latch

Assembly,

Secondary

Latch, Pivots,

Spring

Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Hood and Door

Hinges

Weatherstrip

Conditioning

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol

(GM Part No. 12346293, in

Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,

Category LB or GC-LB.

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube

(GM Part No. 12346241, in

Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Lubricant

(GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or

Dielectric Silicone Grease

(GM Part No. 12345579, in

Canada 992887).

7-9

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Part

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

2.2L and 2.4L Engines

Engine Oil Filter

Passenger Compartment Air Filter

Spark Plugs

2.2L and 2.4L Engines

Wiper Blades

Front – 19.7 inches (50 cm)

Rear – 10.8 inches (27.4 cm)

22731072

12605566

52493319

12625058

25882578

22709463

A3054C

PF457G

CF125

41-103

7-10

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011

Engine Drive Belt Routing

Dotted line shows routing for vehicles without air conditioning.

Black plate (11,1)

7-11

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

Maintenance Record

After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date

Odometer

Reading

Serviced By Services Performed

7-12

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Date

Odometer

Reading

Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Serviced By Services Performed

7-13

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

Date

Odometer

Reading

Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Serviced By Services Performed

7-14

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)

Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . 8-14

Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . 8-14

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

OnStar ® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

8-1

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

Customer Assistance and

Information

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, in the

U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre at

1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance representative:

.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.

.

Dealership name and location.

.

Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility.

That is why we suggest following Step One first.

8-2

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line ®

Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address:

BBB Auto Line Program

Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.

4200 Wilson Boulevard

Suite 800

Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all 50 states and the

District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/

Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

8-3

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

For further information concerning eligibility in the

Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors

Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777

(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Program c/o Customer Communication Centre

General Motors of Canada Limited

Mail Code: CA1-163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN).

Online Owner Center

Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.) www.chevyownercenter.com

Information and services customized for your specific vehicle — all in one convenient place.

.

Digital owner manual, warranty information, and more.

.

.

Storage for online service and maintenance records.

Chevrolet dealer locator for service nationwide.

.

Exclusive privileges and offers.

.

.

Recall notices for your specific vehicle.

OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries.

Other Helpful Links

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/pages/mds/ helpcenter/faq.do

.

.

FAQ

Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is a password-protected section of www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to:

.

My Showroom: Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area.

.

My Dealers: Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers.

8-4

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

.

.

My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and service estimates, check trade-in values, or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profile.

My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.ca section within www.gm.ca.

Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users

To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones

(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the

U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:

1-800-833-2438. TTY users in Canada can dial

1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance Offices

Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Chevrolet Motor Division

Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 33170

Detroit, MI 48232-5170 www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-1020

1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone

Devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-243-8872

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)

1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

8-5

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

Canada

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre,

Mail Code: CA1-163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)

1-800-263-7854 (French)

1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, and

Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except

Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.

Customer Assistance Center

Av. Ejercito Nacional #843

Col. Granada

C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0800

Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800

GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program

This program is available to qualified applicants for cost reimbursement of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limited offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance

Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.

Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

8-6

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Roadside Assistance Program

For U.S.

‐ purchased vehicles, call 1 ‐ 800 ‐ 243 ‐ 8872;

(Text Telephone (TTY): 1 ‐ 888 ‐ 889 ‐ 2438) .

For Canadian ‐ purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800 .

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following information ready:

.

.

Your name, home address, and home telephone number.

Telephone number of your location.

.

.

.

.

Location of the vehicle.

Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle.

Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km

(100,000 mi), whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In

Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of

Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times.

8-7

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

Services Provided

.

.

.

Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.

Lock ‐ Out Service: Service to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar. For security reasons, the driver must present identification before this service is given.

Emergency Tow From a Public Road or

Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.

.

.

Flat Tire Change: Service to change a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and properly inflated.

It is the owner's responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.

Battery Jump Start: Service to jump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included in Roadside

Assistance

.

Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.

.

.

.

Legal fines.

Mounting, dismounting, or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non-public road or highway.

Services Specific to

Canadian

Purchased Vehicles

.

.

Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement is approximately

$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service.

Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.

.

Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of

North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route. There is a limit of six requests per year.

Additional travel information is also available.

Allow three weeks for delivery.

8-8

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

.

.

Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must be over 250 kilometers from where your trip was started to qualify. General Motors of Canada

Limited requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization has been received, the Roadside

Assistance advisor will help to make arrangements and explain how to receive payment.

Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside Assistance advisor may give permission to get local emergency road service. You will receive payment, up to $100, after sending the original receipt to

Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be covered, however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility.

Scheduling Service Appointments

When the vehicle requires warranty service, contact the dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising the service consultant of your transportation needs, the dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety related. If it is, please call the dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same-day repair.

Courtesy Transportation Program

To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy

Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada), extended powertrain, and/or hybrid ‐ specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportation options are available to assist in reducing inconvenience when warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “ Warranty and Owner Assistance Information ” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

8-9

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to minimize inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, the dealer can offer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering

Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one ‐ way or round ‐ trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of the dealer's area.

Public Transportation or Fuel

Reimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and public transportation is used instead of the dealer's shuttle service, the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See the dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.

8-10

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

The dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if the vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts.

This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.

It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional Program Information

All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Please contact the dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy

Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Collision Damage Repair

If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.

Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of

Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's originally designed appearance and safety performance; however, the history of these parts is not known.

Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle

Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your

GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts is not covered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state ‐ of ‐ the ‐ art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment.

8-11

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your

GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you ensure that your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.

If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that ensures repairs with

Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only if its position puts you in danger, or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.

8-12

Give only the necessary information to police and other parties involved in the crash.

For emergency towing see

Roadside Assistance

Program on page 8 ‑ 7 .

Gather the following information:

.

.

Driver's name, address, and telephone number

Driver's license number

.

.

.

.

Owner's name, address, and telephone number

Vehicle license plate number

Vehicle make, model, and model year

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

.

.

Insurance company and policy number

General description of the damage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality replacement parts. See “ Collision Parts ” earlier in this section.

If the airbag has inflated, see

What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? on page 2 ‑ 66 .

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair

Process

In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,

GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.

Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new

Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.

Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your

GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.

Remember, if your vehicle is leased, you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine

GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurance company is paying for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company's collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that company. In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as the cost stays within reasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA

1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

.

8-13

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, and notify General Motors of Canada

Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport Canada

Road Safety Branch

2780 Sheffield Road

Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to General

Motors

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor Division

Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 33170

Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or

1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, Mail Code:

CA1-163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications Ordering

Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on the engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service

General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of the vehicle.

8-14

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Owner Information

Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The Owner Manual includes the

Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and

Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and shipping fees.

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and shipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123

Monday - Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM

Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only

(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, Incorporated

P.O. Box 07130

Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Make checks payable in U.S. funds.

8-15

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

Vehicle Data Recording and

Privacy

Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle ’ s performance and how it is driven. For example, your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash, and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help your dealer technician service your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may also retain the owner ’ s personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

.

How various systems in your vehicle were operating

.

.

.

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened

How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal

How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

8-16

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request of police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as required by law.

Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for

GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar

®

If your vehicle is equipped with an active OnStar system, that system may also record data in crash or near crash ‐ like situations. The OnStar Terms and

Conditions provides information on data collection and use and is available in the OnStar glove box kit, at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by pressing the Q button and speaking to an advisor.

8-17

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID)

RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security, as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information.

Radio Frequency Statement

This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with

Industry Canada Standards RSS ‐ 210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. The device may not cause interference.

2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

8-18

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

A

Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7

Adjustment

Chime Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Air Filter, Passenger Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Airbag

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

Airbag System

How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-66

When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Airbags

Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Antenna

Fixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Antenna, XM ™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . 4-84

Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99

Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96

Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95

Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96

Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95

Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100

Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100

Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

i - 1

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

XM ™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Automatic Transmission

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Bluetooth ® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Brake

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3

Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5

i - 2

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . 6-46

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and Parking

Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

C

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

California

Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6

Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108

Carbon Monoxide

Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Care of

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96

Cargo, Rear Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 6-46

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

Charging

System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Check

Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101

Child Restraints

Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Chime Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103

Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99

Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95

Cleaning (cont.)

Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100

Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100

Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98

Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Competitive Driving, Racing or Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73

Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Coolant

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Engine Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

i - 3

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Customer Information

Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-14

Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

D

Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4

Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Door

Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Door (cont.)

Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Rear Side Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Driver

Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

DIC Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Driving

At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

i - 4

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

E

E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7

EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Electrical System

Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103

Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102

Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . .6-102

Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102

Electronic Immobilizer

PASS-Key ® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Electronic Immobilizer Operation

PASS-Key

®

III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6

Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

Check and Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Engine (cont.)

Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Engine Oil

Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Active Light . . . . . 5-11

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

F

Filter,

Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100

Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5

Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80

Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

i - 5

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

Fluid

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Fog Lamps

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Folding Seatback, Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Front Console Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Front Fog Lamps

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Fuel Economy

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Fuses

Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103

Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102

G

Gasoline

Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Gauges

Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6

H

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and Parking

Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Wiper Activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

i - 6

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Height Adjuster, Driver Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Hideaway Rear Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Hood

Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

I

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Indicator/Warning LIghts

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57

Instrument Panel

Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Integrated Trailer Brake Control

System (ITBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31, 5-37

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

J

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

K

Keyless Entry

Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

L

Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51

Lamps

Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

i - 7

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

Lighting

Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Active . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Locks

Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Locks (cont.)

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Lumbar

Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

M

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Manual Transmission

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Message

DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

i - 8

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

N

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

O

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Off-Road

Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Oil

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4

OnStar, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

OnStar ® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Outlets

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Outside

Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

P

Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100

Park

Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Parking

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Parking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

PASS-Key

®

III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

PASS-Key

®

III+ Electronic Immobilizer

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-4

Personalization

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Phone

Bluetooth ® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

i - 9

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

Power

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102

Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Program

Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4

R

Racing or Other Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Radios

Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

i - 10

Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Rear Side Cargo Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4, 3-5

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Replacement Parts

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a

Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Restraints

Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6

Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Roof

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

S

Safety Belts

Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Safety Defects Reporting

Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73

Seatback, Folding Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Passenger Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Security

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

i - 11

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-5

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102

Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100

Shifting

Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

Spare Tire

Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84

Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82

Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89

Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Steering Wheel Controls, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

i - 12

Storage Areas

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Floor Console Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Hideaway Rear Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . 6-80

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . 6-47

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

PASS-Key

®

III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

PASS-Key

®

III+ Electronic Immobilizer

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels, Cleaning . . . 6-99

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68

If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57

Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63

Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84

Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59

Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58

Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82

Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73, 6-80

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89

Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70

When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

Towing

Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31, 5-37

Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Traction

Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Traction System

Enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Transmission

Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Transmission Operation, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

i - 13

Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

V

Vehicle

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101

Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Parking Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Vehicle Identification

Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102

Vehicle Personalization

DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

W

Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70

When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Windshield

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49

Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98

Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102

Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Wiper Activated Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Wipers

Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

X

XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

XM ™ Satellite Radio

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

i - 14

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents